VR STUDY MATERIAL

II PU PHYSICS

(As per complete NCERT Text Book)

By

VISHWANATHA REDDY G (M.Sc. B.Ed.)

MOB : 9844955950

HOD OF PHYSICS

STUDENT NAME: _________________

ROLL NO. : _______________
 INDEX
Unit Chapter Page
Topic
No. No. No.
I 1 Electric charges and fields 02
Electrostatic potential and
II 2 13
capacitance
III 3 Current electricity 24
IV 4 Moving charges and magnetism 34
5 Magnetism and matter 43
V
6 Electromagnetic induction 49
7 Alternating currents 56
VI
8 Electromagnetic waves 64
VII 9 Ray optics 67
VIII 10 Wave optics 77
11 Dual Nature of Light 84
IX
12 Atoms 90
13 Nuclei 96
X
14 Semiconductor electronics 101
 Chapter wise MCQ’s 110
 Chapter wise Numerical 142
Frequently asked important
 169
questions
Blue print and Model question
 174
papers
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 2

1. ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS

1) What is an Electric charge?
It is the something possessed by the material objects due to which electrical and other related
effects are produced.

2) What is the smallest charge available in nature?

The smallest charge available in nature is charge on the electron. It is equal to 1.6x10 -19C.
3) How will you show that there are two kinds of charges? Explain with diagrams.
From the following observations, it is found that there are two types of electric charges.

Silk Silk Silk threads

threads threads

Glass Ebonite Glass rod Ebonite rod

rods rods

Fig-1 Fig-2 Fig-3

1. When two glass rods rubbed with a piece of silk are brought close to each other, they
repel each other. It is shown in the figure-1
2. When two ebonite rods (plastic rods) rubbed with a fur (wool) are brought close to each
other, they repel each other. It is shown in the figure-2
3. When a glass rod rubbed with a piece of silk and a ebonite rod rubbed with a fur are
brought close to each other, they attract each other. It is shown in the figure-3
Conclusion: One kind of electric charge is produced on glass rod when rubbed with silk and other
kind of electric charge is produced on the ebonite rod when rubbed with fur. Benjamin Franklin
named the charge on the glass rod and fur as positive charge and that on the ebonite rod and silk
as negative charge.

4) What is Electrification?
It is the process of making a body to lose or gain the electrons.
Ex: When a comb is used on dry hair, the comb acquires charge by friction.

5) What is polarity of charge?

It is the property which differentiates the two kinds of charges. ( i.e  sign of charges)

6) Mention the methods of charging a body.

1. Charging by friction:
It is the process of charging a body by rubbing suitably with another body.
2. Charging by conduction:
It is the process of charging a conductor by placing a charged body in contact with it.
3. Charging by induction:
It is the process of charging a conductor by bringing a charged body near to it.
7) State Coulomb’s law in electrostatics:
The force between two point charges is directly proportional to the product of magnitude of
charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. The direction of this
force is along the line joining the two charges.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 3

8) Write Coulomb’s law in vector form :

1 𝑞1 𝑞2 𝑟
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐹12 = 4𝜋𝜖 𝑟̂
12 ( 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑟̂ = |𝑟| )
0 𝑟2

Where r̂ is the unit vector in the direction of 𝐹.

q1 and q2 are the magnitudes of the charges
r is the distance between the charges.

9) Define Permittivity of a medium.

Permittivity is the property of every material, which measures the opposition offered against
the formation of an electric field.
Its value is minimum for air or vacuum. It is given by,o = 8.8510-12 C2/Nm2.

10) What is Relative permittivity or Dielectric constant (r or K )?

It is the ratio of permittivity of the medium to the permittivity of free space.

Relative permittivity r =
o
Dielectric constant (Relative permittivity) has no unit and dimensions. It is a pure number

11) What is Dielectric constant (r or K ) for different medium?

r= ∞ for metals and r= 1for air or vacuum.
The value of dielectric constant depends upon the temperature.

12) Write the SI unit of charge: coulomb is the unit of charge

13) Define the SI unit of charge or define ‘coulomb’.

“1 coulomb is the charge which repels another identical charge with a force of 9109N, when
placed at a distance of 1metre from it in free space”

14) What is gold leaf electroscope (GLE)?

It is an instrument used to detect electric charge and its polarity.

15) Explain the construction and working of gold leaf electroscope.

Charged rod
(Metal sphere) S

C (Cork)
R (metal rod)

B (Bottle)

L1 L2

It consists of a metal rod R fitted in a glass bottle through a rubber cork. S is the small metal
sphere attached to upper end of R . L1 and L2 are the extremely thin gold foils (gold leaves) attached
to the lower end of R . Gold foils have very low mass per unit area and are flexible. Therefore, they
respond very quickly to small electrostatic forces.
When a charged rod is touched with the metal sphere, the charge is transferred to the gold
leaves through the rod. The leaves repel each other due to the same kind of charge and diverge as
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 4

shown in the figure. The divergence in the leaves depends on the amount of charge on them. By
measuring the divergence of leaves, the amount of charge on the body can be estimated.

16) State and explain Superposition principle of electric forces.

Statement
The total force acting on any charge due to a number of other charges is the vector sum of all
the forces due to all the other charges, taken one at a time. The individual forces are not affected by the
presence of other charges.

Explanation
𝐹 = F12 + F13 + F14 + …………. F1n
1 q1q2 1 q1q3 1 q1qn
= r̂ + r̂ + ………. rˆ1n
4 o r12 2 12
4 o r13 2 13
4 o r1n 2
n
qi
F =
q1
4o
 i 2 r1i
rˆ
2 1i

Where r̂12 , r̂13 , r̂14 ,……. rˆ1n are the unit vectors .

17) What is Electric Field?

It is the region around a charge in which other charged particles experience electrostatic forces.

18) What is Uniform electric field?

If the electric field lines are parallel, equidistance and in the
same direction to each other, then that field is uniform electric field.

19) What is non-uniform electric field?

If the electric field lines are not parallel to each other, then that
field is non-uniform electric field.

20) What is Electric intensity (E) or Electric field strength (E)?

Electric intensity at a point in an electric field is the force experienced by unit positive test
charge (q0) placed at that point.
Force F
E= ===> E =
ch arg e qo

𝐹
Electric intensity in vector form 𝐸⃗ =
𝑞0
The SI unit of electric intensity is NC-1 or Vm-1

21) Mention an expression for electric intensity due to a point charge.

1 q
E =
4 o r 2
1 q
In vector form , 𝐸⃗ = rˆ Where q is charge, r is distance and r̂ is the unit vector .
4 o r 2
22) What is electric field line?
An electric field line is a curve drawn in such a way that the tangent to it at each
point is in the direction of the net field at that point

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 5

23) What is Electric dipole?

It is a pair of equal and opposite charges separated by small distance.
Examples: molecules of water, ammonia, HCl and CO2

24) What is an electric dipole moment?

It is the product of magnitude of one of the charge forming the dipole and the distance between
the charges. 𝑃̅
-q +q
2a
The dipole moment p is given by the relation,
p = q (2a) Where q is the magnitude of either charge
25) Vector form of dipole moment.
𝑝 = 𝑞 𝑥2𝑎 p̂ Where p̂ is the unit vector along 𝑃⃗
26) Give the direction and SI unit of dipole moment.
The direction of dipole moment is from negative charge to positive charge.
The unit of dipole moment is coulomb metre (Cm)
Note: The net charge of an electric dipole is zero but electric field is not zero.

27) Mention the expression for electric intensity at a point on the axial line of short dipole and
explain the terms.
1 2 p
E = where p is dipole moment, r is the distance between dipole and a point o
4o r 3
is the absolute permittivity of free space.
28) Mention the expression for electric intensity at a point on the equatorial line of short dipole and
explain the terms.
1 p
E = where p is dipole moment, r is the distance between dipole and a point and o is
4o r 3

the absolute permittivity of free space

29) How electric field depends on distance for a) Isolated point charge b) Electric dipole at large
distance?
1
In the case of single charge , E  2 .
r
1
In the case of dipole at large distance , E  3
r

30) How electric field intensity changes at a point due to short dipole?
Electric field intensity is directly proportional to dipole moment and inversely proportional to
the cube of distance between the dipole and the point.

31) When will be the torque acting on the electric dipole maximum and minimum?
Consider  = p E sin
Case 1 : If  = 0 or 1800  = 0 ----> minimum torque
Case 2 : If  = 900,  = pE ----> maximum torque

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 6

32) Write the vector form of torque acting on the electric dipole moment.
⃗ 𝐱 𝐄⃗
𝝉⃗ = 𝒑
The SI unit of torque is Nm ( Newton-metre)
Torque is vector quantity. Its direction is perpendicular to the plane containing 𝑃̅ and 𝐸̅ .

⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ 𝒐𝒓 ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
33) Define Area Vector (𝒅𝑨 𝒅𝑺 ) .
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝑆
𝒅𝑨 or ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
A small area element dS or dA is represented by vector ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ 𝑑𝐴, which is
perpendicular to and outward from the surface.

If 𝑛̂ is the unit vector along the normal to the area element dS then ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝑆 = 𝑑𝑆 𝑛̂

34) What is Electric flux ()?

It is the total number of electric field lines passing normally through the given
surface. It is a scalar quantity and is denoted by ϕ.

35) Mention Relation between Electric field intensity and electric flux:

Electric flux normally through the area element dS is given by

dϕ = E dS cosθ
𝐬
OR dϕ = 𝐸̅ . 𝑑𝑆
̅ or ∅𝐄 = ∫𝟎 𝐄̅ . ̅̅̅
𝐝𝐒

36) Mention when the electric flux is maximum and minimum.

Case (i) : If θ = 00 then cos00 = 1 therefore ϕ = EA

Case (ii) : If θ = 900 then cos900 = 0 therefore ϕ = 0
Case (iii) : If θ = 1800 then cos1800 = -1 therefore ϕ = -EA

37) Mention the SI unit of electric flux.

Nm2 / C or Volt-meter
38) Mention the types of continuous charge distribution.
1) Linear density of charge.
2) Surface density of charge.
3) Volume density of charge.
39) Define linear density of charge (  ) .
It is the charge per unit length of a wire .
𝑞
It is given by,  = 𝑙
SI unit of line density of charge. coulomb per metre or C/m

40) Define Surface density of charge( ).

It is the charge per unit area of a conductor.
q
It is given by,  =
S
SI unit of surface density of charge.
coulomb per metre2 or C/m2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 7

41) Define Volume density of charge ( ) :

It is the charge per unit volume of a conductor.
q
It is given by ,  =
V
SI unit of volume density of charge.
coulomb per metre3 or C/m3

42) Mention the expression for Electric intensity at a point just outside the surface of spherical shell
1 q
E=
4 o r 2

where q is charge on sphere, r is the distance between spherical shell and a point and o is the
absolute permittivity of free space

43) Mention the expression for Electric intensity at a point on the surface of spherical shell.
When the point lies just outside the shell, r  R ---> radius of the shell.
1 q 
 E= Or E =
4 o R2 o
Since q = 𝜎 A ==> q =  4 R2 ---->(2) [ Surface area of the shell = 4R2]

44) Electric intensity at a point inside the spherical conductor.

Electric intensity at any point inside the conductor is zero. This is because the charge inside the
conductor is zero.
45) Draw the graphical representation of variation of electric intensity with distance from centre.
E

Emax
1
E
r2
E=0 R
r Distance from centre of conductor

46) Mention an expression for electric intensity due to an infinitely long straight uniformly charged
wire and explain the terms

E =
2  r o
Where λ is linear charge density, r is the distance of point from wire and o is the absolute
permittivity of free space

47) Mention an expression for electric intensity due to uniformly charged infinite plane sheet and
explain the terms

E =
2 o
Where σ is surface charge density, r is the distance of point from charged sheet and o is the
absolute permittivity of free space
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 8

Two and three marks important questions

48) Mention the Properties of Charges.
1) Charge is conserved.
2) Charge is quantized.
3) Charge is additive.
4) Like charges repel each other and unlike charges attracts each other.
5) Charge is a scalar quantity.

49) State and explain Coulomb’s law in electrostatics:

Statement.
The force between two point charges is directly proportional to the product of magnitude
of charges and inversely proportional to the square of the distance between them. The direction
of this force is along the line joining the two charges.
Explanation. r
q1 q2
q1q 2 qq
From Coulomb’s Law, F  2
==> F = k 1 2 2
r r
1
In SI system, k = = 9x109 Nm2/C2 and Where o is the absolute permittivity of free space.
4 o
50) Mention the Limitations of Coulomb’s Law.
1) Coulomb’s law is applicable only for point charges.
2) Coulomb’s law is applicable only for static charges.
3) It is applicable only when the distance between the point charges is greater than 10-15 m.
51) Mention the Properties of electric field lines.
1) Electric field lines start from positive charge and ends on the negative charge.
2) They do not meet at all.
3) They do not form closed loops
4) In a charge free region, electric field lines can be taken to be continuous curves without any
breaks

52) Draw the electric field lines due to some simple charge configurations

(-q) (+q)
Fig: (a) Isolated positive charge (b)Isolated negative charge (c) A pair of positive charges (d)A pair of equal and opposite
charges (Electric dipole)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 9

53) Obtain an expression for torque (couple) on a dipole placed in uniform electric field.

E F
+q
O B


p
 2a
-q A

F
We have , E = ===> F = E qo
qo
Torque = magnitude of either force  Perpendicular distance between the two forces
torque = E q  BO----->(4)
BO
From triangle, BOA, sin = ===> BO = AB sin
AB
BO = 2a sin  AB = 2a
  = E q  2a sin

 = p E sin  q  2a = p

54) State and explain Gauss’ law in electrostatics.

Statement.
The total electric flux through closed a surface in free space is equal to 1/o times the net
charge enclosed by the surface. Where  o is the absolute permittivity of free space.
Explanation.
If q is the net charge enclosed by the surface, the total electric flux,
q
=
o
Where o =Permittivity of free space.

55) Obtain an expression for electric intensity due to an infinitely long straight uniformly charged
wire by using Gauss’s theorem.
Let us divide Gaussian surface into three surfaces.
1) flat surface S1 2) flat surface S2 and 3) the curved surface S3 .
Electric flux through the flat surfaces S1 and S2 is zero
Electric flux through the curved surfaces S 3 is given by,
 = E  area of curved surface [  = E  area ]
 = E  2r l ---->(1)
From Gauss’s theorem,
q l q
 = = ---->(2)  = ==> q = l
o o l
On comparing (1)and (2), we get
l 
E  2r l = E =
o 2  r o

In vector form, E = n̂ .
2  r o
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 10

Five marks important questions

56) Derive an expression for electric intensity at a point on the axial line of dipole.
-q O +q E
𝑝

A 2a B E1 P E2
a a
r

Electric intensity at P due to -q ,

1 q 1 q
E1 = = along PA .
4 o AP 2
4 o (r  a) 2
Electric intensity at P due to +q ,
1 q 1 q
E2 = = along BP produced .
4 o BP 2
4 o (r  a) 2
Resultant electric intensity at P, E = E2 - E1 E2 > E1 because (r-a) < (r+a)
q  1 1  q  (r  a) 2  (r  a) 2 
E =   =
2 
 2 

4o  (r  a) 2
(r  a)  4o  (r  a) (r  a) 
2

q  4ar  1 q 4ar 1 q 2 a 2r
E =  2  = =
4o  (r  a 2 ) 2  4o (r 2  a 2 ) 2 4o (r 2  a 2 ) 2

1 2 rp
E =  q 2a = p , dipole moment .
4o (r 2  a 2 ) 2
When 2a << r , a2 can be neglected ( for short dipole)

1 2 p 1 2 p
 E = In vector form, E =
4o r 3 4o r 3

57) Obtain an expression for electric intensity at a point on the equatorial line of dipole.
Q
̅̅̅
𝐸2

𝐸̅ θ P
R 2θ θ

√ ( 𝑎2 + 𝑟2)
̅̅̅
𝐸1
S r

-q θ 𝑝
θ +q
A a 𝑂 a B
2a
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 11

1 q 1 q
Electric intensity at P due to -q, E1 = = along PA -------- (1)
4 o AP 2
4 o (r  a 2 )
2

q 1
Similarly , Electric intensity at P due to +q, E2 = along BPQ ---------(2)
4 o (r  a 2 ) 2

E1 cos is the component of E1 along PR, E2 cos is the component of E2 along PR

Where E1 sin and E2 sin are equal in magnitude and opposite in direction, so they cancel each other.
Resultant electric intensity at P , E = E 1 cos + E2 cos
E = 2E1 cos since E1 = E2
1 q
E = 2 cos ---->(3)
4o (r  a 2 )
2

a a
From triangle POA, cos = = -------(4)
AP (r 2  a 2 )
1 q a 1 q 2a
E = 2 ==> E =
4o (r  a 2 )
2
(r  a )
2 2 4o (r 2  a 2 ) 3 2

1 p
E = ( q 2a = p--->electric dipole moment )
4o (r 2  a 2 ) 3 2
When 2a<<r , a2 can be neglected ( for this condition the dipole is said to be short dipole)
1 p 1 p
 E = , In vector form, E = -
4o r 3
4o r 3
Where negative sign indicates that electric field intensity and dipole moment are opposite in direction
along the equatorial line.

58) Obtain an expression for electric intensity due to uniformly charged infinite plane sheet by using
Gauss’s theorem.

End face-1 End face-2

E E
r r

Total electric flux through the cylindrical Gaussian surface is given by ,

 = Flux through end face-1 + Flux through end face-2 + Flux across curved surface.--->(1)
The electric flux through the curved surface is zero while the flux through the curved surface is
not zero.
(1) ===> = E A + E A + 0   = E  area

 = 2 E A ---->(2)
From Gauss’s theorem ,
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS 12

q  A q
 = = ---->(3)  = ==> q =  A
o o A
On comparing (1)and (2), we get,
 A
E2A=
o

E =
2 o
In vector form

𝐸⃗ = 𝑟̂
2 o where 𝑟̂ is the unit vector along 𝐸⃗

59) Obtain an expression for electric intensity at a point outside a charged spherical shell by using
Gauss theorem.

Gaussian surface +
+ R S
O r P E

The electric flux through the Gaussian surface is given by ,

 =  E cos . S.----->(1)
(1)==> =  E S. (∵ cos0 = 1 )
 = E S ---->(2) (∵ S = 4r2 )
(2) ==>= E × 4  r2 ---->(3)
q
From Gauss Theorem ,  = ---->(4)
o
On comparing the equations (1) & (2), we get
q
E × 4  r2 =
o
q
E =
4o r 2
1 q
E=
4 o r 2
In vector form
1 q
𝐸⃗ = 𝑟̂
4 o r 2 where 𝑟̂ is the unit vector along

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 13

2.ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

1) What is Electric potential (V)?

Electric potential at a point in an electric field is the work done in moving unit positive test
charge (without acceleration) from infinity to that point .
Workdone W
V= ==> V=
Ch arg e qo

2) Mention the SI unit of electric potential.

‘Volt’ is the SI unit of electric potential. Symbol is V.

3) Define ‘volt’ or define the SI unit of electric potential.

“Electric potential at a point in an electric field is said to be 1volt, if 1joule of work is done in
moving 1coulomb of charge (without acceleration) from infinity to that point”

4) Define Potential difference.

Electric potential difference between two points in an electric field is the work done in
moving a unit positive test charge (without acceleration) from one point to another point.
A B E
 
Let VA & VB be the potentials at two points A and B respectively in an electric field of
strength E .
W
Potential difference, V = (VA-VB) =
qo
5) Define the SI unit of electric potential difference.

Electric potential difference between two points in an electric field is said to be 1volt, if 1
joule of work is done in moving 1coulomb of charge (without acceleration) from one point to another
point .
.

NOTE:
1. Both electric potential and potential difference are scalar quantities.
2. Electric potential at infinity is taken as zero.
6) Write an expression for electric potential due to uniformly charged spherical shell at a point
(a) outside the shell , (b) on the shell and (c) inside the shell.
(a)Electric potential at a point outside the shell.
1 q
V= .
4 o r
Where q is the total charge on the shell.
r is distance from the centre of shell such that r > R . R is the radius of shell

b)Electric potential at a point on the shell

1 q
V=
4 o R
Where q is the total charge on the shell.
R is the radius of shell
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 14

c)Electric potential at any point inside the shell .

1 q
V= Where q is the total charge on the shell. R is the radius of shell
4 o R

7) What is the electric potential inside the spherical shell?

The field inside the shell is zero because charge is zero. There is no charge inside the shell to
oppose the motion of test charge .Therefore, the potential is constant inside the shell and equals its
value on the surface.
8) State the superposition principle of electric potentials. Mention expression for electric potential
due to a group of n point charges .
Statement.
The total electric potential at a given point due to a group of charges is the algebraic sum of
the all the potentials due to all the charges.
Explanation. q1 q4

r1 P r4

r2 r3 q3

q2

1  q1 q2 q3 q 
V =             n 
4 o  d1 d 2 d 3 rn 
n
qi
r
1
V =
4 o i 1 i

9) Mention an expression for Electric potential due to an electric dipole.

1  p cos 
V=    q2a= pelectric dipole moment
4o  r 2 - a 2 cos 2 

10) Mention an expression for Electric potential due to an electric dipole on axial line

1  p 
V=  
4o  r 2 - a 2 
11) Mention the value for Electric potential due to an electric dipole on equatorial line

V=0
12) What is an equipotential surface? Give one example.

It is the surface which has the same electric potential at every point .
Eg: The surface of a charged shell or charged spherical conductor .

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 15

13) Draw Equipotential surface for a point charge.

1 q
For a point charge q , the potential is given by , V =
4 o r
14) Draw Equipotential surfacefor a uniform electric field.
E

Equipotential surfaces

15) Draw Equipotential surfacefor a dipole. (Two equal and opposite charges)

Equipotential surfaces

+ -

16) Give the importance of equipotential surface.

Electric field is stronger if the equipotential surfaces are closer together. Electric field is
weaker if the equipotential surfaces are farther apart.

17) Define electric potential energy of a unit positive test charge .

The electric potential energy of a charge qo (unit positive test charge) at any point in an
external electric field is the work done by an external force in moving qo from infinity to that point
without acceleration.

18) Define electric potential energy difference.

The electric potential energy difference of qo (unit positive test charge) between two
pointsinan external electric field is the work done by an external force in moving qo from one point
to another point without acceleration.
19) Mention the units of electric potential energy.
1) The SI unit electric potential energy is joule
2) Another most commonly used unit in atomic physics is ‘electron volt’ or eV

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 16

20) Define ‘electron volt’

The electron volt is the potential energy gained or lost by an electron in moving
through a potential difference of 1volt.

21) Mention the relation between electron volt and joule .

 1eV = 1.610-19 J

22) Derive an expression for electric potential energy due to a dipole placed in a uniform electric
field.

E
F

p +q
θ

-q

Torque acting on the electric dipole

 = p E sin
Small work done in rotating the dipole without acceleration is given by ,
dW =  d
dW = p E sin d
The total work done in rotating the dipole from 1 to 2 is given by
2 2
2
W= 

dW = 

pE sin d = p E  cos 
1
1 1

W = p E cos1  cos2 
This work done is stored in the dipole as potential energy .
 U = p E cos1  cos2 
If initially the dipole is oriented perpendicular to the direction of E (1 = 90o) and then
brought to an angle  (2 =  ) , the potential energy of the dipole will be
U = p E [ cos 90  cos  ]
U = - p E cos 
23) Mention the value for electric potential energy due to a dipole placed in a uniform electric field
in different cases
Consider the relation , U = - p E cos  ----->(1)
Case-1 : Position of stable equilibrium .
When  = 0o , U = - p E
This is the minimum potential energy. In this position, the dipole will be in the stable equilibrium

Case-2 : Position of unstable equilibrium .

When  = 180o , then , U = + p E
This is the maximum potential energy. In this position, the dipole will be in the unstable
equilibrium .
Case-3: Position of zero potential energy.
When  = 90o ,U = 0
In this position the potential energy of the dipole is zero.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 17

24) Mention the various electrostatic properties shown by the conductors when placed in the
electrostatic field.
1) Net electric field is zero in the interior of a conductor when placed in the electrostatic field.
2) At the surface of a charged conductor, electric intensity must be normal to the surface .
3) The net charge at any point inside the conductor is zero and any excess charge resides at its
surface.
4) Electric potential is constant at any point inside and on the surface of a charged conductor.
5) Electric intensity inside the cavity of any charged conductor is zero.

25) Mention an expression for electric intensity at a point just outside the
P
irregular shaped conductor by using Gauss’s law. E
 
E= In vector form 𝐸⃗ = nˆ
o o
Where n̂ is the unit vector normal to the surface in outward direction .

26) What is electrostatic shielding?

It is the phenomenon of protecting a certain region from an external electric field.
27) Mention the applications of electrostatic shielding .
1) In thunderstorm accompanied by the lightning, it is safer to sit in a car or in a bus, rather than
under a tree or on the open ground. The metallic body of the car or bus becomes electrostatic
shielding from lightning.
2) Electrostatic shielding is used to protect sensitive components of electronic devices from external
electric disturbances .
3) Electrostatic shielding is used to design TV cables. Etc .

Capacitors
28) What is a Capacitor ?

It is a device used to store the electric charges and hence electric energy .
It consists of two conducting plates separated by a small gap with dielectric medium. One
plate is insulated and another plate is earthed. The most commonly used dielectrics are air , mica ,
paper etc . If the dielectric is air , then the capacitor is called as condenser .

29) Draw the circuit symbol capacitor

Fixed capacitor Variable capacitor

30) Define capacitance of a capacitor.

It is defined as the ratio of the charge on the capacitor to the potential difference between the
two plates of the capacitor.
Unit of capacitance of a capacitor ----> farad. Symbol----> F
31) Define the SI unit of capacitance of a capacitor.
Capacitance of a capacitor is said to be 1 farad, when charge on the capacitor is 1 coulomb
and the potential difference between the plates is 1volt .

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 18

32) Mention the factors on which the capacitance of conductor depends.

1) Shape and size of the conductor.

2) The nature (permittivity) of the surrounding medium.

33) Mention expression for capacitance of an isolated spherical conductor.

C = 4orR (R is the radius of the sphere)

34) Mention the factors on which the capacitance of spherical conductor depends.
1) The radius of the conductor.
2) The dielectric medium surrounding the conductor.

35) What is a parallel plate capacitor ?

A parallel plate capacitor consists of two metal plates parallel to each other and separated by a
small distance.

36) Define Energy density and mention its expression.

Energy density is defined as energy stored per unit volume of space.
𝟏
U = 𝟐 𝜺𝟎 E2 Where E is electric field, 𝜀0 is permittivity of free space.

37) Mention expression for energy stored in a capacitor .

Q2
U=
2C
1 1
Other forms of expressions , U = CV 2 and U = QV
2 2

38) Mention an expression for equivalent (effective) capacitance when n capacitors in series
For n capacitors in series combination as shown in the below figure ,
1 1 1 1 1 
=    ................  
CS  C1 C 2 C3 Cn 
NOTE :
1. If two capacitors of capacitances C1& C2 are in series then the effective capacitance is
C1C 2
Cs =
C1  C 2
2. If n identical capacitors each of capacitance ‘C’ are connected in series, then the effective
C
capacitance Cs =
n

39) Mention an expression for equivalent (effective) capacitance when n capacitors in parallel
For n capacitors in parallel combination as shown in the below figure,

Cp =C1 + C2 + C3+ ……………+Cn

NOTE:
1) If two capacitors of capacitances C1& C2 are in parallel, then the effective capacitance is
Cp = C1 + C2
2) If n identical capacitors of each capacitance ‘C’ are connected in parallel, then , Cp = nC

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 19

40) Define dielectric constant/relative permittivity in terms capacitance of a capacitor.

Dielectric constant/relative permittivity of a medium is the ratio of capacitance of capacitor

with a dielectric medium other than free space to the capacitance of same capacitor with the free
space between the plates.
41) What are dielectrics? Give examples.

These are the insulators which transmit electric effects without conducting charges.
Example : paper, mica, ceramics, pure water, oxygen etc…

42) What is electric polarization? or What is polarization density?

When a dielectric is placed in an external electric field, the dipole moment that developed per
unit volume of the dielectric is called as electric polarization. It is denoted by P.
Dipole moment of dielectric
P =
Volumeof dielectric
It is vector quantity. Its direction is in the direction of external field.
43) What is dielectric breakdown?
When a dielectric medium is placed in a very high electric field, the electrons get detached
from their parent atoms and become free. Then the insulator behaves like a conductor. This
phenomenon is called as dielectric breakdown.

44) What is dielectric strength?

It is the maximum value of electric field strength that can be applied to the dielectric without
dielectric breakdown

45) Mention the SI unit of dielectric strength

Its SI unit is Vm-1 or N C-1 (It is the SI unit of electric intensity).

The dielectric strength of dry air at NTP is 3106Vm-1

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
1. Common potential.
When capacitors are charged separately to different potentials and connected in parallel, the
potential across the combination is called as common potential. It is given by the relation ,
Total charge q1  q2  q3  .......... C1V1  C 2V2  C3V3  .........
VC = = =
Total capacitanc e C1  C2  C3  ......... C1  C 2  C3  .........
q1  q2 C1V1  C 2V2
For two capacitors, VC = ====>VC =
C1  C 2 C1  C 2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 20

Two and Three mark important questions

46) Mention the important properties of equipotential surfaces.

1) Work done is zero in moving a test charge over an equipotential surface

2) The direction of electric intensity is always normal to the equipotential surface at every point.
3) Equipotential surfaces are closer together in the region of strong electric field and equipotential
surfaces farther apart in the region of weak electric field.
4) Two equipotential surfaces never be intersect each other.
dV
47) Relation between electric intensity and electric potential or Derive E = 
dx

Work done in moving qo from B to A

dW = - F  dx [ W = Force  displacement]
Work done
We have, potential difference =
ch arg e moved
dW
V-(V-dV) =
qo
dW F dx
dV = = 
qo qo
dV =  E dx
dV F
∴ E =  =E
dx qo

Where , negative sign indicates that the direction of electric intensity E is in the direction of
dV
decreasing potential and is the potential gradient .
dx
48) Deduce an expression for electric potential energy of system of two point charges.

q1 r q2

A B
1 q1
Electric potential at B due to q1 is given by , V1 =
4 o r
Work done in bringing the charge q2 from infinity to the point B
W
W = V1 q2 [ since V = ==> W = qV]
qo
1 q1
W =  q2
4 o r
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 21

This work done is stored in the charges as potential energy and given by ,
1 q1q 2
PE = U =
4 o r
Where r is the distance between the charges

49) Mention the factors on which the capacitance of parallel plate capacitor depends
1) Directly proportional to the area of each plate.
2) Inversely proportional to the distance between the plates.
3) Directly proportional to the dielectric constant between the plates.
50) How can you increase the capacitance of parallel plate capacitor?

1) Increasing the area of the plates.

2) Decreasing the distance between the plates.
3) Using a medium of high permittivity between the plates.

51) What are polar and non molecules? Give examples.

Polar molecules: These are molecules in which the centers of positive and negative charges do
not coincide. Ex : H2O , HCl , etc.
Non Polar molecules: These are molecules in which the centers of positive and negative charges
coincide. Ex : O2 , N2 , H2 , CO2 . etc.

52) What are polar and non polar dielectrics? Give one examples
Polar molecules: These are dielectrics which are made of polar molecules.
Example--> water
Non polar molecules: These are dielectrics which are made of non-polar molecules.
Example--> oxygen

53) Derive an expression for equivalent (effective) capacitance when 2 capacitors in series .
C1 C2 CS
+Q -Q +Q -Q +Q -Q

V1 V2

+ - + -
V V

In series combination, V = V1 + V2---->(1)

Q Q Q
On applying the relation V = to each capacitor , we get , V1 = andV2 =
C C1 C2
Q Q 
V =  
 C1 C2 
1 1
V = Q    ----->(2)
 C1 C2 
If the combination is replaced by an equivalent capacitor of capacitance C s,
Q
then , V = ---->(3)
CS
On comparing (2) and (3), we get

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 22

Q 1 1
= Q  
CS  C1 C2 
1 1 1 
=   
CS  C1 C2 
54) Derive an expression for equivalent (effective) capacitance when 2 capacitors in parallel.

C1
+Q1 -Q1 CP
+Q -Q
C2
+Q2 -Q2

+ -
+ v-
+ -
V

In parallel combination , total charge , Q = Q 1 + Q 2 ------->(1)

Q = C1V + C2 V (since Q = CV)
Q = V [ C1+ C2 ]------>(2)
If the combination is replaced by an equivalent capacitor of capacitance Cp , figure-2
then Q = CpV---> (3)
On comparing (2) and (3), we get Cp V=V [C1 + C2 ]
==> Cp = C1 + C2

Five mark important questions

55) Derive an expression for electric potential due to an isolated point charge.

p B A E 
+q dx q0
r x

1 q qo  1 q1q2 
From Coulomb’s law, F =
4 o
---->(1)  F  
x 2
 4o r 2 
The work done in moving qo from A to B is
dW = - F dx ----->(2) [ Work done = Force  displacement]
Negative sign indicates that the work is done opposite to the direction of electric intensity.
1 q qo
(1) in (2)==> dW = - dx ---->(3)
4 o x 2
The work done in moving qo from x =  to x = r.
r r

  1 q qo
W = dW =  dx
  4o x2
r


q qo 1 q qo   1 
W =  dx = 
4o  x 2
4o  x 
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G r VR MATERIALS


ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE 23

q qo  1 1 
W = 
4o  r  
q qo  1  1
W = [ since = 0]
4o  r  
W
We have , electric potential , V =
qo
1 q
V=
4 o r

56) Obtain an expression for capacitance of parallel plate capacitor

+ -

Q
Capacitance of the capacitor is given by , C = ----->(1)
V
V
For uniform electric field , we have , E = ----->(2)
d
Between the plates, the electric intensities due to two plates are in the same direction and add up .
   
E =   ----->(3) ( For a plane sheet, E = )
2 o 2 o  o 2 o
Where ,  o is the permittivity of free space.
On comparing (2) and (3). we get,
V 
=
d o
 d
===> V = -----> (4)
o
Q o
Equation (4) in equation (1) ===> C = ----->(5)
d
 A o
C = [Q =  A]
 d
o A
C =
d
When the gap between the plates is filled with a dielectric medium other than free space ,
 A
C= o r
d

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 24

CHAPTER 3 - CURRENT ELECTRICITIY

1) Define electric current.

It is defined as the time rate of flow of electric charge through any cross section of a conductor.
𝐧𝐞𝐭 𝐟𝐥𝐨𝐰 𝐨𝐟 𝐜𝐡𝐚𝐫𝐠𝐞 𝐪
Electric current, 𝐈= =
𝐭𝐢𝐦𝐞 𝐭𝐚𝐤𝐞𝐧 𝐭

2) Mention the SI unit of current.

S.I unit of electric current is ampere.

3) Define the SI unit of current.

If one coulomb of charge flows in one second across any cross section of a conductor then the
current is said to be one ampere
4) What are the properties of electric current?
 The direction of flow of positive charge gives the direction of flow of conventional current.
 The direction of flow of electrons gives the direction of flow of electronic current.
 The direction of electric current is opposite to that of conventional current.
 Electric current is scalar quantity.
5) What are current carriers?
The charged particles whose flow in a definite direction constitutes the electric current are
called current carriers. In different situation current carriers are different.
(i)Solids: In solids conductors like metals current carriers are free electrons.
(ii)Liquids: In liquids current carriers are positive and negative ions.
(iii)Gases: In gases current carriers are positive ions and free electrons.
(iv)Semiconductors: In semiconductors current carriers are holes and free electrons.
6) Define relaxation time.
The time interval between two successive collisions between electron and ion in the
conductor is called relaxation time ‘𝜏’.
It is of the order of 10-14 sec. The electron accelerates for an average time interval ‘𝜏’.
𝐦𝐞𝐚𝐧 𝐟𝐫𝐞𝐞 𝐩𝐚𝐭𝐡 𝞴
𝛕 = 𝐫𝐦𝐬 𝐯𝐞𝐥𝐨𝐜𝐢𝐭𝐲 𝐨𝐟 𝐞𝐥𝐞𝐜𝐭𝐫𝐨𝐧𝐬 = 𝑽
𝒓𝒎𝒔

7) Define current density.

The electric current per unit area normal to the direction of current is known as current
density J.
𝐈
i.e, 𝐉 = 𝐀 SI units : ampere/m2

Therefore, in vector notation, I = J AcosӨ

I = J.̅ A
̅

8) Write Current density in terms of velocity of charges:

W.K.T I = n e A Vd
i n e A Vd
So, J=A= A
= n e Vd

9) write Current density in terms of Electric field:

We know, I = n e A Vd
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 25
⃗τ
+eE
⃗⃗⃗⃗d | = Vd =
And we know, |V m
𝐧 𝐞𝟐 𝐄 𝛕
From both equations, we get, 𝐉= 𝐦

10) What is Resistance? And mention its properties.

The property of the material of the conductor (substance) by virtue of which it opposes
the flow of current through it.

It is ratio of the potential difference V across it to the current I flowing through it.
R=V/I SI Unit : Volt/ampere or Ohm

 It is a Scalar quantity, as it is the characteristic of the specimen as a whole.

 It does not depend upon the potential difference applied across it (or) the current
passed through it.

11) Define the SI unit of resistance or define One Ohm.

The resistance of a conductor is said to be one ohm if one ampere current flows through it
under a potential difference of 1 volt.

12) On what factors affecting the resistance of a conductor depends?

(1) the nature of the material
(2) Its dimensions (length, area of cross section)
(3) Physical conditions like temperature, pressure and impurities.

13) Define conductance.

Reciprocal of resistance is called conductance of a conductor.
1
i.e., G = 𝑅 SI units : Ohm-1 or mho or Siemen (S)

14) Define Resistivity (or) Specific resistance.

𝒍
We know, 𝐑= 𝛒 𝐀

𝐑𝐱𝐀
𝛒= 𝒍 SI unit: ohm - m
“Resistance of a conductor of unit length and unit area of cross section is called specific resistance or
resistivity of the material of the conductor”.

15) On what factors the Resistivity depends?

 The resistivity depends on the material of the conductor and the temperature but not on its
dimensions.
 Resistivity is the specific property of a material but resistance is the bulk property of the
conductor.

16) Define Conductivity (σ).

Reciprocal of Resistivity is called conductivity.
𝟏
i.e., 𝛔 = 𝛒 SI unit : mho/m or siemen/m

17) What is the Resistivity of various materials?

Metals - 10-8𝛺𝑚 to 10-6𝛺𝑚 .
Insulators – 1018 times greater than metals
Semiconductors – In between metals and insulators.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 26

18) How resistivity depends on temperature for different materials.

The resistivity of a metallic conductor is approximately given by
T = 0[1 +(T–T0)]
Where T is the resistivity at a temperature T and 0 is the same at a reference temperature T0.
α is called the temperature co-efficient of resistivity,

19) Define electrical energy.

The work done by a source to maintain a current in an electrical circuit is known as electric
energy.

20) Define electrical Power.

The rate of doing electrical work that is energy dissipated is called electric power.
It is given by
∆𝐖
𝐏 = ∆𝐭 = 𝐕𝐈

Using Ohm’s law, we get P = I2R = V2/ R

21) what is equivalent or effective resistor.

A single resistor which maintains the same current at the same potential difference as that of
the combination of resistors.

22) Mention an expression for effective resistance of n resistors in series.

1. For n resistors connected in series
2. Rs= R1+ R2 + R3 ---------Rn
3. If n identical resistors of resistance R are in series than R s = nR

23) Mention an expression for effective resistance of n resistors in paralel

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
 For n resistors connected in parallel = + + +−−−−−−−
𝐑 𝐩 𝐑 𝟏 𝐑 𝟐 𝐑 𝟑 𝐑𝐧
 If n identical resistors of resistance R are connected in parallel then RP = R/n
 If two resistors are in parallel then current in any one branch
𝐦𝐚𝐢𝐧 𝐜𝐮𝐫𝐫𝐞𝐧𝐭 ×𝐨𝐭𝐡𝐞𝐫 𝐫𝐞𝐢𝐬𝐢𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐜𝐞
=
𝐬𝐮𝐦 𝐨𝐟 𝐭𝐡𝐞 𝐫𝐞𝐬𝐢𝐬𝐭𝐚𝐧𝐜𝐞𝐬
 Using n conductors of equal resistance, the number of possible combinations is 2 n-1.
 If the resistances of n conductors are totally different, then the number of possible
combinations will be 2n.
24) Define electric Cell.
The device which converts chemical energy into electrical energy is known as electric cell.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 27

25) What are the properties of a cell?

 A cell neither creates nor destroys charge but maintains the flow of
charge present at various parts of the circuit by supplying energy
needed for their organized motion.
 Cell is a source of constant emf but not constant current.
 Mainly cells are of two types :
(1) Primary cell : Cannot be recharges (ie., only discharging takes
place)
(2) Secondary cell : Rechargeable (ie., charging and discharging
takes place)
 The direction of flow of current inside the cell is from negative to
positive electrode while outside the cell is from positive to negative
electrode.
 A Cell is said to be ideal, if it has zero internal resistance.

26) Define EMF of a cell (ε).

EMF is the potential difference between the positive and negative electrodes in an open circuit,
i.e., when no current is flowing through the cell.
SI units : J/C or Volt.
It is a scalar quantity.

27) On what factors EMF of a cell depends.

 EMF depends on nature of electrolyte, metal of the electrodes, temperature of the electrolyte.
 EMF doesnot depend on the size of the cell ie., on the area of plates and distance between
them.

28) Define the SI unit of EMF of a cell.

EMF of a cell is said to be ONE VOLT if one joule of work is done to drive 1 coulomb of charge
throughout the circuit.
29) Define Terminal p.d Or Terminal voltage.
Terminal p.d is the potential difference between the positive and negative electrodes in an closed
circuit,
i.e., when current is flowing through the cell and external resistor.
SI units : J/C or Volt

30) Define internal resistance of a cell (r). and mention the factors on which it depends.
It is the opposition offered by the electrolyte and electrodes of a cell to the flow of current
through it.
It is denoted by r,
Its SI unit is Ohm

Internal resistance depends on the following factors

(1) Nature of electrolytes and electrodes of a cell.

(2) Distance between the electrodes.
(3) Area of the electrodes
(4) Concentration of the electrolyte. CELL
(5) Temperature of the electrolyte.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 28

31) Obtain the relation between EMF and terminal p.d.

V
By definition, R
EMF, ε = V + V1
I I

By ohm’s law V= IR, V1=Ir A ε r B

ε = IR + Ir V1
ε = I (R+r)
𝛆
∴I=
R+r
Since external resistor R is connected in parallel to the electrodes of the cell, so the terminal p.d of
the cell is equal to the p.d across the resistor R
i.e, V = IR
therefore, ε = V + Ir
V = ε – Ir
Hence terminal p.d of the cell is less than emf of the cell

If the circuit is open, I =0 V= ε

32) Mention an expression of equivalent emf and equivalent internal resistance in series
1. If n cells of emfs ε 1, ε 2, ε 3,------ ε n and of internal resistance r1, r2, r3---- rn respectively
are connected in series then
ε eq = ε 1+ ε 2+ ε 3 + ------ + ε n
req = r1+r2 +r3------+rn
2. If current leaves any cell from negative electrode, emf of that cell is takes as negative
ε eq= ε 1 - ε 2 E1 E2

req=r1+r2 I r1 I r2 I

33) Mention an expression of equivalent emf and equivalent internal resistance in parallel.
For a parallel combination of n cells we can write
𝛆𝒆𝒒 𝛆𝟏 𝛆𝟐 𝛆𝒏
= + + −−−−+
𝒓𝒆𝒒 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐 𝒓𝒏
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
and = + + −−−
𝒓𝒆𝒒 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐 𝒓𝒏

If two cells of same emf E and same internal resistance r are connected in parallel then
𝛆𝐫 + 𝛆𝐫 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟐 𝐫
𝛆𝐞𝐪 = 𝐫+𝐫
= 𝛆 and = + = , 𝐧𝐞𝐪 =
𝐫𝐞𝐪 𝐫 𝐫 𝐫 𝟐

Thus in parallel combination of cells

1) The equivalent emf of parallel combination of cells of same emf is equal to emf of one
cell.
2) The reciprocal of equivalent internal resistance of cells is equal to sum of the reciprocals
of the internal resistance of each cell.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 29

NOTE: 1. Expression for current in parallel combination of m identical cells is

𝛆 𝐦𝛆
𝐈= 𝐫 =
𝐑 + ⁄𝐦 𝐦𝐑 + 𝐫

If R << r/m then I = m ε /r

= m times the current due to a single cell
If R >> r/m then I = ε /R = current due to a single cell
Hence maximum current can be drawn from a parallel combination of cells if the external
resistance is very low as compared to the total internal resistance of the cells.
34) What is Wheatstone bridge?
It is an arrangement of four resistors in the form of a bridge.
It is used to find the ratio of two resistance values or to determine the value of an unknown
resistance.

Two and Three marks important questions

35) Define Mobility.

Mobility of a current carrier is defined as the ratio of the drift velocity of current carrier to the
applied electric field
V
μ = Ed The SI unit of mobility is m2/Vs

𝑒𝐸𝜏 𝑒𝜏
Since 𝑉𝑑 = , we have 𝜇=
𝑚 𝑚

36) What is drift velocity and obtain an expression for it.

The average velocity with which free electrons in a conductor get drifted in a direction
opposite to the direction of electric field is called drift velocity.

The force experienced by a free electron in the conductor placed in the electric field is
𝐅 = −𝐞𝐄⃗
The acceleration produced in the electron is
𝐅
𝐚⃗ = where m is the mass of electrons
𝐦
−𝐞𝐄⃗
𝐚⃗ =
𝐦
The drift velocity is given by
⃗
−𝐞𝐄
⃗⃗⃗⃗𝐝 = 𝐮
𝐕 ⃗ + 𝐚⃗𝛕 = 𝟎 + 𝛕
𝐦

⃗
⃗⃗⃗⃗𝐝 | = 𝐕𝐝 = +𝐞𝐄𝛕
|𝐕 This is the relation between drift velocity and electric field.
𝐦

37) State and explain Ohm’s law.

“The steady current(I) flowing through a conductor is directly proportional to the potential
difference (V) across its ends provided the physical conditions of the conductor such as temperature,
pressure, strain etc remain unchanged”.
𝐈𝛂𝐕
1
I= V
R
𝐕 = 𝐈𝐑… (1) Where the constant of proportionality R is called
electrical resistance of the conductor.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 30

38) Mention the limitations of Ohm’s law:

1. Ohm’s law applicable only for good conductors.
2. Ohm’s law applicable only, when the physical conditions like temperature, pressure and tension
remains constant.
3. Ohm’s law is not applicable at very low temperature and very high temperature.
4. Ohm’s law is not applicable for semiconductors, thermistors, vacuum tubes, discharge tubes.
Therefore Ohms law is not a universal law.

39) How resistance of a conductor depends on length and area of a conductor

The resistance of a conductor at a certain temperature is found to be directly proportional to
length and inversely proportional to its area of cross section
𝒍
𝐑𝛂 𝐀
𝒍
𝐑= 𝛒 Where the constant of proportionality ρ is called the resistivity or specific
𝐀
resistance.

40) Obtain the relation between J and σ.

If E is magnitude of electric field in the conductor whose length is l and v is the p.d across its ends
V
then E = 𝑙 or V = E𝑙
V 𝑙
We know I=R ,I=JA and R= ρ A

El
Therefore, JA = l
ρ
A

E 1
J = ρ = σE Where 𝜎 = 𝜌 is called the conductivity.

𝐉 = 𝛔𝐄 is an equivalent form of Ohm’s law called as microscopic form of Ohm’s law.

FIVE mark important questions

ne2 τ
41) Derive the expression for conductivity: σ = m
Where the symbols have their usual meaning
Let ‘n’ be the number of free electrons per unit volume of the conductor, then
total number of free electrons in the conductor
= n × volume of the conductor = n × Al

the total charge in the conductor is, q = ( nAl ) e

The steady current I is given by,
𝑛𝐴𝑙𝑒 𝑙
I = q/t = 𝑙⁄ (t = 𝑣 )
𝑉𝑑 𝑑

𝐼 = 𝑛𝐴𝑒𝑉𝑑 ------ (1)

𝐼
𝐽 = 𝑛𝑒𝑉𝑑 ------- (2) ( since J = 𝐴 )

𝑒𝐸𝜏 𝑒𝐸𝜏
But 𝑉𝑑 = ∴ 𝐽 = 𝑛𝑒
𝑚 𝑚

𝑛𝑒 2 𝜏
J= E -----(3)
𝑚
But J = σ E ------ (4)
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 31

Comparing eq (3) and (4)

𝑛𝑒 2 𝜏
σ =
𝑚

42) Derive an expression of equivalent emf and equivalent internal resistance in series.
The cells are said to be connected in series if the negative terminal of one cell is connected to
the positive terminal of the next cell and so on.
E1 B E2 Eeq
A  C  A C
I r2 I I req I
I r1

P.d between the positive and negative terminals of the first cell is
VAB = ε 1 - Ir1
p.d between positive and negative terminals of second cell is
VBC = ε 2 - Ir2
p.d between A and C of the series combination of the two cells is
VAC = VAB + VBC
= ε 1 - Ir1 + ε 2 - Ir2
VAC = (ε 1+ ε 2) – I(r1+r2)------ (1)
If the series combination of two cells is replaced by a single cell between A and C of emf E eq
and internal resistance req as shown in the figure then
VAC = ε eq - Ireq ---------(2)
Comparing equations (1) and (2) we get
ε eq = ε 1+ ε 2 and req =r1 + r2
43) Derive an expression of equivalent emf and equivalent internal resistance in parallel.
The cells are said to be connected in parallel if the positive terminal of all the cells are joined
together and negative terminals of all the cells are joined together.

E1
I1 I2
r1
Eeq
A C A C
B1 B2
I I I I
E2 req
I2 I2
r2
Total current I = I1+I2
Let V1 and V2 be the potentials at B1 and B2 respectively.
The p.d between the terminals of first cell is

V= ε 1 - I1r1
𝛆1 − V
∴ I1 =
r1
The p.d between the terminals of second cell is

V= ε 2 - I2r2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 32

𝛆2 − V
∴ I2 =
r2
I = I1 + I2
𝛆1 − V 𝛆2 − V
I= +
r1 r2
𝛆1 𝛆2 1 1
I=( + ) − V[ + ]
r1 r2 r1 r2
r1 +r2 𝛆1r2 + 𝛆2r1
V( )= −I
r1 r2 r1 r2
𝛆 𝐫 +𝛆 𝐫 𝐫 𝐫
𝐕 = 𝟏 𝐫𝟐 +𝐫 𝟐 𝟏 − 𝐈 (𝐫 𝟏+𝐫𝟐 ) -------- (1)
𝟏 𝟐 𝟏 𝟐

If the parallel combination of cells is replaced by a single cell between B 1and B2 of emf ε eq and
internal resistance req then
V = 𝛆eq − Ireq ---------(2)

Comparing equations 1 and 2 we get

𝛆𝐞𝐪 = 𝛆𝟏𝐫𝐫𝟐𝟏++𝐫𝛆𝟐𝟐𝐫𝟏 ---------(3) and

𝐫𝟏 𝐫𝟐 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝐫𝐞𝐪 = ---------(4) or = +
𝐫𝟏 +𝐫𝟐 𝒓𝒆𝒒 𝒓𝟏 𝒓𝟐

44) State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws.

Kirchhoff’s first law(Junction rule or current rule)

Statement: At any junction, the sum of currents entering the junction is equal to the sum of the
currents leaving the junction.

Explanation: I5
I4
According to the current rule

I1 - I2 + I3 + I4 - I5 = 0
N
I1 + I3 + I4 = I2 + I5 I1
I3
i.e, sum of the entering currents = sum of the leaving I2
currents.

 First law is based on the law of conservation of charge.

Kirchhoff’s second law: (loop rule or mesh rule)
Statement: The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any closed loop involving resistors
and cells in the loop is zero i.e, Σ∆V = 0

Explanation:

Consider a closed electrical circuit as shown in the figure containing two cells of emf’s ε 1 and ε 2
and three resisitors of resistances R1, R2 and R3. The currents are as indicated in the figure

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 CURRENT ELECTRICITY 33

Applying Kirchhoff’s second law to the loop ABCDA we get

-I1R2- I1R1 + ε 1 = 0

 Kirchhoff’s second law is based on the law of conservation of energy.

45) Deduce the condition for balance of a Wheatstone bridge using Kirchhoff’s laws.

Applying KVL to the loop ABDA B

(I1 - Ig)
-I1P - IgG + I2R = 0 ---- (1) P Q
Ig
I1
Applyig KVL to the loop BCDB A C
G
B
I2
-Q (I1-Ig)+S(I2+Ig)+ IgG = 0----- (2)
I S I
R
For balancing condition current through (I2 + Ig)
D
the galvanometer is zero i.e, Ig = 0
Equation (1) reduces to E
I1P – I2R =0
I1 P = I2 R ----- (3)
Equation 2 reduces to
QI1 -SI2 = 0
QI1 = SI2 ---- (4)

𝐏 𝐑
Dividing eqn (3) by (4) we get =
𝐐 𝐒

This the balancing condition for Wheatstone bridge

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 34
4.MOVING CHANGES AND MAGNETISM

1. What is the conclusion of Oersted’s experiment leading to the discovery of

magnetic effect of current.
Oersted concluded that moving charges or currents produced a magnetic field
in the surrounding space.
Note:
(1) A current or a field (electric or magnetic) emerging out of the plane of the paper
is denoted by a dot ⊙.

(2) A current or a field (electric or magnetic) going into the plane of the paper is
denoted by a cross ⊗.

2. What is magnetic field?

The space or region around a current carrying conductor or the space around
a magnet in which its magnetic effect can be felt is called magnetic field.

3. What is the source of magnetic field?

A moving charge is a source of both electric field as well as magnetic field.

Magnetic field (B) is a vector.

It is also called magnetic induction or magnetic flux density.

4. What is the rule used to find direction of magnetic field?

Right hand thumb rule: If a current carrying conductor is imagined to be held in

the right hand such that the thumb points in the direction of current then the tips of
the curled fingers encircling the conductor will give the direction of the magnetic
field lines.

Maxwell’s cork screw rule: If the forward motion of a right handed screw is in
the direction of the current through a conductor then the direction of rotation of the
screw gives the direction of the magnetic lines of force around the conductor.

5. State Flemings left hand rule..

The direction of this force is given by Fleming’s left
hand rule. It states that “Stretch the first three fingers of left
hand such that they are mutually perpendicular to each
other, if fore finger is along the field, central finger is along
the direction of motion of charged particle then thumb gives
the direction of force experienced by the charged particle”.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 35
6. Define magnetic field in terms of magnetic force.
Magnetic field at a point is defined as the force acting on a unit positive
charge moving with unit velocity perpendicular to the direction of magnetic field.

7. Define the SI unit of magnetic field.

SI unit of magnetic field is Tesla.
The magnetic field at a point is one tesla if a positive charge of one coulomb
moving with a velocity of 1ms-1 at right angles to the field experiences a force of one
newton.

8. Discuss the motion of a charged particle in a uniform magnetic field with initial
velocity at an angle between 00 and 900 with magnetic field direction.

Consider a charged particle of mass m moving with velocity V at an angle  (other

than 00, 900 and 1800) with the direction of magnetic field.
 When 𝜃 = 00 or 1800 remains unaffected as no force acts on the charged
particle when it moves parallel to the magnetic field
 When 𝜃 = 900 particle tends to move in a circular path in a plane to the
magnetic field
 When 𝜃 is between 00 and 900 the particle travels in a helical path with its axis
parallel to the magnetic field.
9. Define current element.

A small length of the current carrying conductor is called current element. It is

the product of current  and the length 𝑑𝑙 of very small segment of a current carrying
conductor.
⃗⃗⃗ .
It is a vector represented as 𝐼𝑑𝑙
Its direction is tangent to the element and acting in the direction of current flow.

10. Mention the expression for magnetic field at the centre of the circular coin of n
turns
𝝁𝟎 𝒏𝑰
Magnetic field at its centre of circular coil of n turns is 𝑩 =
𝟐𝑹

11. What is the magnetic field at the ends of air cored solenoid
𝜇0 𝑛𝐼
𝐵=
2

12. When is the torque acting on the current loop is maximum and minimum when
placed in uniform magnetic field.
𝜏 = 𝑚𝐵𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
⃗
1. When the plane of the loop is parallel to the direction of the magnetic field 𝐵
then 𝜃 = 00
𝜏 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝐵 cos 𝜃 = 𝐼𝐴𝐵, Which is the maximum value.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 36
2. When the plane of the loop is perpendicular to the direction of magnetic
⃗ then 𝜃 = 900
field 𝐵
𝜏 = 𝐼 𝐴 𝐵 cos 90 = 0, which is the minimum value.
13. Define Magnetic dipole moment of a current loop:
The magnetic moment of a current loop is defined as the product of current I and
the area vector 𝐴 of the loop.
𝑀⃗⃗ =NI𝐴
Where N is the total number of turns.
⃗⃗ is along the normal to the plane of the loop.
The direction of dipole moment 𝑀

14. How circular current loop as a magnetic dipole:

When current flows in a circular loop, it behaves as a magnetic dipole. One face of
the loop behaves as a North Pole and the other face behaves as a south pole.

If current flows in anticlockwise direction then the face of the loop behaves as
a north pole and if current flows in clockwise direction then the face of the loop
behaves as a south pole.

15. What is Moving coil Galvanometer? And mention its principle.

It is an instrument used for the detection and measurement of very small currents
of order of 10-8 to 10-10 A.
It works on the principle of when a current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic
field, it experiences a torque and deflection of the coil is directly proportional to the
current through it (I 𝛼 )
16. What is sensitivity of a galvanometer?
A galvanometer is said to be sensitive if a small current flowing through the coil
of a galvanometer produces a large deflection in it.
17. What is current sensitivity of a galvanometer?
The current sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the deflection produced in
the galvanometer per unit current flowing through it
 𝑛𝐵𝐴
Current sensitivity =
𝐼 𝐶

18. What is voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer?

Voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the deflection produced in the
galvanometer per unit voltage applied to it
  𝑛𝐵𝐴
Voltage sensitivity = = =
𝑉 𝐼𝑅 𝐶𝑅

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 37
19. What is the resistance of ideal ammeter?
Resistance of an ideal ammeter is zero.
20. What is the resistance of ideal ammeter?
Resistance of an ideal voltmeter is infinity
21. Derive an expression for the torque acting on a current loop placed in a uniform
magnetic field
Consider a rectangular loop PQRS suspended in a
⃗. ⃗⃗⃗
𝐹4 S
uniform magnetic field 𝐵
Let PQ= RS=l (=length of the loop) 𝜃 ⃗
𝐁
I 𝛼 ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐹3
and QR=SP=b=breadth of the loop. Let I be the current P N
flowing through the coil in the direction PQRS and θ be the
angle made by the plane of the coil with the direction of I ⃗
𝐵
magnetic field. The force F2 and F4 are equal and opposite I
and hence they cancel each other. ⃗
𝐵
The magnetic force experienced by the side PQ and SR are R
given by
⃗⃗⃗
𝐹1
𝐹1 = 𝐹3 = 𝐵𝐼𝑙 I
Q
These two equal and opposite forces acting at different ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐹2

points form a couple which deflects the coil. 𝑇 𝜃 𝑆

The moment of the deflecting torque is 𝜃
𝜏 = 𝑚𝑎𝑔𝑛𝑖𝑡𝑢𝑑𝑒 𝑜𝑓 𝑒𝑖𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑟 𝑓𝑜𝑟𝑐𝑒 × 𝛼 𝐵
𝑝𝑒𝑟𝑝𝑒𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑐𝑢𝑙𝑎𝑟 𝑑𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 𝑏𝑒𝑡𝑤𝑒𝑒𝑛 𝑡ℎ𝑒𝑚
𝜏 = 𝐵𝐼𝑙 × 𝑆𝑇 [cos 𝜃 = 𝑁
𝑆𝑇 𝑃
, 𝑆𝑇 = 𝑏 cos 𝜃]
𝑃𝑆
𝜏 = 𝐵𝐼𝑙 × 𝑏𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
𝜏 = 𝐵𝐼𝐴𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 (𝑙 × 𝑏 = 𝐴, area of the loop)
𝜏 = 𝑚𝐵𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃 (𝑚 = 𝐼𝐴 is the magnetic dipole moment of the loop)
𝜏 = 𝑚 𝐵 cos(90 − 𝛼) ∴𝝉 = 𝒎 𝑩 𝒔𝒊𝒏𝜶

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 38

Two and Three mark important questions

22. Mention an expression for magnetic force acting on a moving charge. Mention
when it is maximum and minimum.
The magnitude of this magnetic force is given by Fm= qvB Sin
Where q is the charge, v is velocity of charged particle, B is
magnetic field and  is the angle between B & v.
 If  = 0 or 1800 then Fm = 0 minimum
 If  = 900 Fm = qVB maximum
23. Mention an expression for Magnetic force on a current carrying conductor.

F=I(l×B)
The direction of the force F is ⊥ar to both l and B.
The magnitude of this force is F = BIl Sin.
Where B is magnetic field, I is current, l is length of conductor and  is the angle
between B & l.
24. Derive an expression for radius, Time period, frequency and angular frequency of
a circular motion of charge in uniform magnetic field

The magnitude of the magnetic force on the charged particle is F = qvb  = 900.
The centripetal force on the charged particle of mass m moving in a circular path of
𝑚𝑣 2
radius r is
𝑟
𝑚𝑣 2
 = qvb
𝑟
𝑚𝑣
r= .
𝑞𝐵
Time period
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 2𝜋𝑟 𝑚𝑣 2𝜋 𝑚𝑣 2𝜋𝑚
𝑇= = But r = ∴𝑇= =
𝑠𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 𝑣 𝑞𝐵 𝑣 𝑞𝐵 𝑞𝐵
1 𝑞𝐵
Frequency of the charged particle is 𝑓 = =
𝑇 2𝜋𝑚
𝑞𝐵
Angular frequency𝜔 = 2𝜋𝑓 = ⁄𝑚
Time period or frequency is independent of velocity of the particle and radius of the
circular path. It depends only on the magnetic field and the nature of the particle.
25. What is Lorentz force? And mention the expression for it.

When a charged particle is moving with a velocity in the presence of both electric
field and magnetic field then it experiences a net force called Lorentz force.
Lorentz force F = Fe + Fm
F =q E + q (V × B)

F = q [E + (V × B)]

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 39
26. State and explain Biot – Savart’s law:
The magnetic field dB at a point due to a current element  dl is

(1) Directly proportional to the strength of the electric current 

(2) Directly proportional to the length dl of the current element
(3) Directly proportional to the sin of the angle  between the current element and
the line joining the point of observation with the current element and
(4) Inversely proportional to the square of the distance r of the point from the
current element.

𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
𝑑𝐵 ∝
𝑟2
𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
𝑑𝐵 = 𝑘
𝑟2

𝜇0
In SI k = where 𝜇0 is a constant called the
4𝜋
permeability of free space.
Its value is 4𝜋 × 10−7 tesla meter/ampere
𝜇0 𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
𝑑𝐵 =
4𝜋 𝑟2
Vector form
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ ×𝑟)
𝜇0 𝐼(𝑑𝑙
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝐵 =
4𝜋 𝑟3
The direction of ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝐵 is perpendicular to the plane containing ⃗⃗⃗
𝑑𝑙 and 𝑟
27. State and explain Ampere’s circuital law.
“The line integral of the magnetic field around any closed path is free space is
equal to absolute permeability (𝜇0 ) times the total current enclosed by that path”.
⃗ . 𝑑𝑙 = 𝜇0𝐼
i.e., ∮ 𝐵

28. Derive an expression for magnetic field strength due to a straight current carrying
wire by applying Ampere’s circuital law.
y
Applying Ampere’s circuital law to the loop we get

⃗ . 𝑑𝑙 = 𝜇0 𝐼 ⟶ (1)
∮𝐵 ⃗
𝐵
𝑑𝑙
⃗ . 𝑑𝑙 = ∮ 𝐵. 𝑑𝑙 cos 0 = 𝐵 ∮ 𝑑𝑙 = 𝐵 × 2𝜋𝑟⟶ (2)
But ∮ 𝐵 r P

Compare (1) and (2)

𝜇0 𝐼 I
𝐵 × 2𝜋𝑟 = 𝜇0 𝐼 𝐵=
2𝜋𝑟 X
29. What is a solenoid? Mention the expression for magnetic field due to a current
carrying solenoid.
“A long coil of insulating wire consisting of closely packed loops is called a
solenoid”. Its length is very large as compared to its diameter.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 40
B = 𝝁𝟎 𝒏𝑰 where 𝝁𝟎 permeability of free space
n number of turns & I is the current through solenoid
30. Explain how to convert a galvanometer into an ammeter:
Ammeter is a device used to measure current.
A galvanometer is converted into an ammeter I
G
by connecting a low resistance called shunt I g I
resistance parallel to the coil of the galvanometer. I - Ig
S
p.d across S = p.d across G

(I-Ig)S = IgG

S= IgG/I-Ig
𝑆
(or) Ig = ( ) I  Ig 𝛼 I
𝑆+𝐺

Since G and S are constant for a given ammeter

31. Explain how to convert a galvanometer into an voltmeter:

A galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by connecting a suitable high
resistance in series with it.

𝐼𝑔 𝐼𝑔
G
Ig R

Since G and R are in series

V = Ig (G+R)
R + G = V /Ig
R = (V/Ig) – G
Since R and G are constant for a given voltmeter V 𝜶Ig.

32. What is the nature of force acting between 2 parallel current carrying wires.

The two conductors attract each other when they carry currents in the same
direction (parallel currents) and
They repel each other when they carry currents in opposite directions (anti-
parallel currents).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 41

FIVE mark important questions

33. Derive an expression for magnetic field at a point on the axis of a circular current
loop by applying Biot-Savart’s law.

According to the Biot Sarvart’s law,

magnetic field at P due to the current
element Idl is
𝜇0 𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝜃
𝑑𝐵 =
4𝜋 𝑟2
𝜇0 𝐼𝑑𝑙
dB = ∵ 𝜃 = 900 & 𝑟 2 = (𝑥 2+ 𝑅 2)
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 + 𝑅2 )

The vertical components of dB is cancelled and horizontal components added up.

dBx = dB cos 𝛼 over the loop.

2πR

B = ∫ dB cos α
0
2𝜋𝑅 𝜇0 𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑅
= ∫0 cos 𝛼 Since cos𝛼 = 1⁄
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 + 𝑅 2 ) (𝑥 2 +𝑅 2 ) 2

2𝜋𝑅 𝜇0 𝐼𝑑𝑙 𝑅
= ∫0 1⁄
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 + 𝑅 2 ) (𝑥 2 +𝑅 2 ) 2

2𝜋𝑅 𝜇0 𝐼𝑅 𝑑𝑙 𝜇0 𝐼𝑅 2𝜋𝑅
= ∫0 3 = 3 ∫0 𝑑𝑙
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 +𝑅 2 ) ⁄2 4𝜋 (𝑥 2 +𝑅2 ) ⁄2
𝜇0 𝐼𝑅
B= (2𝜋𝑅)
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 +𝑅 2 )3⁄2

𝜇0 2𝜋𝐼𝑅 2
In vector form ⃗ =
𝐵 𝑖̂
4𝜋 (𝑥 2 +𝑅2 )3⁄2

34. Derive an expression for the force between two straight parallel current carrying
wires and hence define one ampere.
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐵1
The magnetic field B1 due to the conductor X
at the site of the conductor Y is given by
𝝁𝟎 𝑰𝟏 F2 F1
𝑩𝟏 = ⨂ Q P
𝟐𝝅𝒅 l
Conductor Y which carries a current I2 will I1 I2
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐵2
experience a force F1due to B1. d
𝝁𝟎 𝑰𝟏 𝑰𝟐 𝒍 X Y
F1 = B1 I2l = toward X
𝟐𝝅𝒅

The magnetic field B2 due to y at the sight of the conductor X is

𝝁𝟎 𝑰𝟐
𝑩𝟐 = ⨀
𝟐𝝅𝒅
The force on a segment L of the conductor X due to B2 is
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM 42
𝝁𝟎 𝑰𝟏 𝑰𝟐 𝒍
F2 = B2I1l = towards Y
𝟐𝝅𝒅

The two forces F1 and F2 are equal and acting in opposite direction.
𝑭 𝝁𝟎 𝑰𝟏 𝑰𝟐
The force per unit length on each conductor is =
𝒍 𝟐𝝅𝒅

Definition of ampere:
Ampere is defined as that current which when flowing in each of the two
infinitely long parallel conductors 1 m apart in free space will cause each conductor
to experience a force of 2×10-7 Nm-1.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MAGNETISM & MATTER 43
5. MAGNETISM AND MATTER

1. What is magnetism?
The property of attracting substances like Steel, Nickel, Iron, Cobalt etc is called
Magnetism.
2. What are magnets?
The substances which exhibit the property of magnetism are called magnets.
Magnets are classified into two groups
1. Natural magnets (Magnets occurred in nature are called natural magnets. Ex:
Fe3O4, Earth.)
2. Artificial magnets (Magnets made by us are called artificial magnets. Ex: Bar
magnets, Horse shoe magnet, dumb bell magnets etc).
3. What is a bar magnet?
A bar magnet is generally a rectangular shaped small piece of a rod having south
and north poles of same strength separated by a small distance.
 In fact, one end of the bar magnet acts as north pole and
the other end acts as a south pole.
4. What is the pole of a magnet?
The magnetism of the magnet is concentrated nearer to ends of the magnet. These
end points are called poles.

5. Define Pole strength (m).

The ability of a pole to attract or repel other magnetic pole is called pole strength.
S.I unit: Am
 It’s a scalar quantity.

6. What is magnetic dipole?

A magnetic dipole consists of two unlike poles of equal strength and separated by a
small distance.
 Bar magnet is also called as magnetic dipole.
7. Define magnetic length (2l⃗):
The perpendicular distance between two poles of the magnet is called magnetic
length. S.I unit: meter (m)
 It is a vector quantity because it should always measure from south pole to
north pole of bar magnet.
8. Define magnetic moment(M ⃗⃗⃗⃗):
The product of pole strength and length of magnet is called magnetic moment.
M = m.2l
S.I unit: A m2
 It is a vector quantity.
 Its direction is from south pole to north pole of bar magnet.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MAGNETISM & MATTER 44
9. Mention the properties of magnets.
1. Attractive property.
2. Directive property.
3. Inductive property.
4. Poles always occur in pairs.
5. Poles in a magnet are having same pole strength.
6. Like poles repel each other and unlike poles attract each other.
10. What is Magnetic Field(B)?
The space around the magnet, in which its magnetic effect can be experienced, is
called magnetic field.

11. What is a magnetic field line?

The path followed by the unit north pole placed in a magnetic field is called
magnetic field line.

12. Draw the magnetic field lines for a Bar magnet, current carrying solenoid and
electric dipole.

13. Define magnetic flux.

The number of magnetic field lines passing through any surface is called magnetic
flux.
φ=B ̅ .A
̅ = 𝐵𝐴 𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃
 It is a scalar quantity.  S.I unit : Weber(Wb)
14. Define strength of magnetic field.
The magnetic flux per unit area is also called Strength of magnetic field or magnetic
flux density
𝜑
𝐵=  It is a vector quantity
𝐴
15. Mention the SI unit of magnetic field.

SI unit : tesla(T), 1 tesla(T) = 1 newton ampere-1 metre-1 (NA-1m-1)

= 1 weber metre-2 (Wbm-2)
or
gauss(G), 1 gauss = 10-4 tesla
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
MAGNETISM & MATTER 45
16. What is uniform magnetic field.
If the magnetic induction is same at all points in the field then the field is called
uniform magnetic field.

17. What is non Uniform magnetic field.

If the magnetic induction is not same at all points in the field then the field is
called non uniform magnetic field.
18. Define magnetic Permeability (μ).
The property of the medium which allows magnetic field is called Permeability.

19. Mention the expression for Magnetic induction on the axial line of bar magnet:
Magnetic induction on the axial line of bar magnet:
μo 2Md
B axial = . 2
4π (d − l2 )2
Its direction is from south pole to north pole of bar magnet along its axial line.
 For short bar magnets l2 << d2
μo 2M
B axial = .
4π d3
20. Mention the expression for Magnetic induction on the equatorial line of bar magnet:
Magnetic induction of the equatorial line of a magnet
μo M
∴ 𝐵𝐸𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 = . 3
4π ( 2
d + 𝑙 2 )2
Magnetic induction direction is from North pole to south pole of magnet parallel to magnetic
axis.
 For short bar magnets l2 << d2
μo M
𝐵𝐸𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑡𝑜𝑟𝑖𝑎𝑙 = .
4π d3

21. Show that a bar magnet is equivalent to a current carrying solenoid.

𝜇0 2𝑀
B= Where M = (n 2l) i A
4𝜋 𝑟3

This is similar to magnetic induction on the axial line of a bar magnet

∴ solenoid will behave as a magnet having magnet moment M = N iA
Where N = n 2l = Total number of turns

22. Mention an expression for torque acting on a magnetic needle placed in magnetic
field. Torque = |𝝉| = mBsin𝜽
 When θ = 0o , τ= MBsin0 = 0 , minimum
 when θ = 90o , τ = MB, maximum
23. What is potential energy of a magnet? And mention its expression.
Work done to rotate the magnet from a position of maximum Torque is called P.E
of the magnet.
w = ∫ dw = ∫ MBsinθ dθ
 P.E = - MB cos
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
MAGNETISM & MATTER 46
24. Write the electrostatic Analogue of magnetism

25. What is the fundamental difference between electricity and magnetism?

 In electricity, an isolated charge can exist but in magnetism, an isolated magnetic
pole does not exist.
 In electricity, no torque acts on a point charge, when placed in a uniform electric
field. In magnetism, torque acts on magnetic dipole when placed in uniform
magnetic field.

26. Define Magnetic permeability(μ):

The ratio between magnetic induction(B) and magnetic intensity (H) is called
magnetic permeability
𝐵
𝜇= S.I unit: N/A2 D.F : [MLT-2A-2]
𝐻

27. Define Relative permeability (μr):

The ratio between permeability of a medium to permeability of vacuum is called
relative permeability
𝜇 r = 𝜇/𝜇 0
 It is having no units and dimensions
28. Mention the relation between μr and 𝒳m :
 𝜇𝑟 = 1 + 𝒳𝑚

29. Mention the types of magnetic materials:

1. Diamagnetic materials
2. Para magnetic materials
3. Ferro magnetic materials
30. What are Diamagnetic materials? Give an example.
Magnetic materials which are weakly repelled by the magnets are called
Diamagnetic materials
Ex: Copper, Silver, Zinc, Bismuth, Lead etc.

31. What are Para magnetic materials? Give an example.

Magnetic materials which are weakly attracted by the magnets are called
paramagnetic materials
Ex: Aluminum, platinum, Manganese, chromium etc

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MAGNETISM & MATTER 47
32. What are Ferro magnetic materials? Give an example.
Magnetic materials which are strongly attracted by the magnets are called
Ferromagnetic materials
Ex: Iron, Cobalt, Nickel etc

33. What are the types of Ferro magnetic materials?

Hard magnetic materials: The Ferro magnetic materials in which the magnetization
persists when external magnetic field is removed are called hard magnetic materials.

Soft magnetic materials: The Ferro magnetic materials in which the magnetization
disappears when external magnetic field is removed are called soft magnetic
materials

34. What are the properties of Hard Ferromagnetic materials?

 These are used to make permanent magnets
 Commonly steel is used to make a permanent magnet.
 Ex: Alnico (alloy of aluminum, nickel and cobalt), steel, cobalt, steel etc

35. What are the properties of Soft Ferromagnetic materials?

 It is easy to magnetize and demagnetize soft magnetic materials.
 Ex: soft iron

TWO and THREE mark important questions

36. Mention the properties of magnetic field lines.
1. Magnetic field lines are closed loops.
2. The magnetic fields lines never intersect with each other.
3. The tangent drawn to a magnetic field line any point gives the direction of
magnetic field at that point.
4. Outside the magnet they move from north to South Pole of magnet and inside the
magnet they move from south to North Pole of the magnet.

37. State and explain Gauss law in magnetism:

The net magnetic flux through any closed surface is always zero.
⃗⃗. ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝜑B = ∮ 𝐵 𝑑𝑠 = 0
 For any closed surface, the number of lines entering the surface equals to number
leaving surface. Thus net magnetic flux is zero.
 Gauss law confirms that magnetic monopoles do not exist.
38. Define Magnetic intensity or Magnetizing field (H) and mention its SI unit.
The ratio between magnetic induction of vacuum and permeability of vacuum is
called Magnetic intensity
𝐵0
H= S.I unit: A/m
𝜇0
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
MAGNETISM & MATTER 48
39. Define Intensity of magnetization or magnetization (I) and mention its SI unit.
The magnetic moment of specimen per unit volume is called intensity of
magnetization
I=M/V S.I unit: A/m

40. Define Magnetic susceptibility (𝒳m )

The ratio between intensity of magnetization (I) and magnetic intensity (H) is called
magnetic susceptibility

𝓧𝒎 = I / H It is having no units and dimensions

 It indicates the aptness of acquiring magnetism of a magnetic material.

41. Mention the properties or Differences between Dia, Para and Ferromagnetic
materials.
Sl
Diamagnetic substances Paramagnetic substances Ferromagnetic substances
no

Magnetic materials Magnetic materials Magnetic materials which

which are weakly repelled which are weakly attracted are strongly attracted by
1.
by the magnets by the magnets the magnets

They move slowly from They move slowly from They move quickly from
2. stronger to weaker parts of weaker to stronger parts of weaker to stronger parts of
the field. the field the field
Magnetic susceptibility is Magnetic susceptibility is Magnetic susceptibility is
3. small and negative small but positive. 𝓧m > very large and positive. 𝓧m
𝓧m < 1 1 >> 1
Intensity of magnetization Intensity of magnetization
Intensity of magnetization
4. is low but positive. is high and positive.
is low and negative

Their relative permeability Relative permeability is Relative permeability is too

5. is less than one (μr < 1) greater than one (μr > 1) greater than one (μr >> 1)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 49
6. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION

1) Define Magnetic Flux.

 The total number of magnetic field lines passing through an area normally is called
magnetic flux.
 Then the magnetic flux through the coil.Φ =A n.B =B A cosθ.
 If the coil is having N number of turns, Φ =BANcosθ.
 The S.I unit-Weber.
 It is a scalar quantity.
 Dimensional formula [ ML2T-2A-1]
2) On what factors the magnetic flux depends?
The magnetic flux depends on,
1. Induction field strength (B)
2. Area of the coil (A)
3. Number of turns (N)
4. Angle between normal of the coil and direction of field (θ)

3) What is Electromagnetic Induction?

Whenever magnetic flux associated with the coil changes an e.m.f and current generates
in the coil. This phenomenon is called electromagnetic induction.
The generated e.m.f is called induced e.m.f and the current is called induced current.

4) Explain Faraday coil coil with key experiment.

In this experiment Faraday connected a tap key K to the
current carrying coil C2.
At the instant key K is closed, the galvanometer needle
deflects in one direction and then returns to zero.
At the instant key K is opened, the galvanometer needle
deflects in opposite direction and again returns to zero.
Finally the galvanometer reads zero when there is either a
steady current or no current in the coil C2.

Reason for deflection

1. When the key is closed, the magnetic field produced by the current in the coil C2
changes from zero to some value over some finite time, because the field associated
with coil C1 changes.
2. Again when key is opened, the magnetic field decreases to zero over some finite time
and again the change in magnetic field induces current in C1.
3. When there is a steady current or no current in the coil C2, no change in magnetic field
and hence no deflection is observed.
4. From these observations, Faraday concluded that an electric current can be induced in a
circuit by changing magnetic field.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 50
5) Explain Lenz’s law.
Explanation
S S
N N

When North Pole of the magnet is moved towards the coil, due to increase in flux, e.m.f
develops and current flows in anti-clock wise direction. Then the plane of coil facing North
Pole of magnet will act as a north pole. So the motion of the magnet is opposed. Hence work is
done to move the magnet towards the coil.
When North Pole of magnet is moved away from the coil, the magnetic flux linked with
the coil decreases. Due to decrease in the flux, e.m.f develops in the coil and current flows in
the coil in clock-wise direction. So the plane of the coil facing the north pole of magnet acts as
a south pole. So due to the attraction between the coil and the north pole of magnet, the motion
of magnet is opposed. So work has to be done to over this repulsive force and this work is
converted into electrical energy.

6) What are the different ways to induce e.m.f in a circuit?

Induced e.m.f
𝒅ø 𝒅(𝐁𝐀𝐍 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝛉)
𝒆=− =−
𝒅𝒕 𝒅𝒕
.
1. By changing magnetic induction with respect to time.
2. By changing area of coil
3. By changing number of turns
4. By changing orientation of coil

7) What is an Inductor?
An element of an electric circuit like a tightly wound coil of insulated wire which opposes the
change in current flowing through it is called an inductor.
The symbol of an inductor is

8) What is self induction?

When the current in a coil changes, an e.m.f is induced in the coil opposing the change in
the current through the coil. This phenomenon is called self induction.

9) Obtain an expression for induced e.m.f in terms of self inductance.

When a current i flows through the coil, the magnetic flux through it is Φ. The magnetic
flux is directly proportional to the current flowing through the coil.

ΦαI or Φ=Li
Where L is called coefficient of self induction or self inductance of the loop.
From Faraday’s law of EMI,
𝒅ø 𝒅(𝐋𝐢)
𝒆=− =−
𝒅𝒕 𝒅𝒕

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 51
10) Mention the Self inductance of a circular coil.

From

Magnetic induction at center of circular coil

11) Mention the Self inductance of a solenoid.

From

Magnetic induction at center of solenoid,

If the number of turns per unit length is n then,n=N/l or N = nl

µ (𝒏𝒍)𝟐 𝑨
𝐋=
𝐥
If the inside of the solenoid is filled with a material of relative permeability μr
L = μ0 μr N2Al

12) What is mutual induction?

When the current in the coil changes, an e.m.f is induced in another coil kept nearer to it.
This phenomenon is called mutual induction.

13) Expression for mutual inductance

The magnetic flux in secondary coil is directly proportional to the current in the
primary coil.
Φsα ip or Φs = M ip
Where M is called coefficient of mutual induction or mutual inductance
From Faraday’s law,
𝒅ø 𝒅(𝐌𝐢 )
𝒆=− =−
𝒅𝒕 𝒅𝒕

14) Obtain an expression for mutaual inductance of a 2 coaxial solenoids.

We denote the radius of the inner solenoid S1 by r1 and the number of turns per unit
length by n1.
The corresponding quantities for the outer solenoid S2 are r2 and n2, respectively.
Let N1 and N2 be the total number of turns of coils S1 and S2, respectively.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 52
The flux linkage with solenoid S1 is
N1Φ1 = M12I2 (1)
The magnetic field due to the current I2 in S2 is μ0n2I2.
The resulting flux linkage with coil S1 is,
N1Φ1 = (n1l)(𝝅r2)(𝝁0n2I2) (2)
where n1l is the total number of turns in solenoid S1.
Thus, from Eq. (1),
M12 = μ0n1n2π𝒓𝟐𝟏 l (3)
Similarly
N2Φ2 = M21 I1 (4)
From eq (4)
M21 = μ0n1n2π𝒓𝟐𝟏 l (5)
From eq (3) & (5) we get

M12 = M21 = M

∴ M = μ0n1n2π𝒓𝟐𝟏 l

15) State Fleming’s right hand rule

Fore finger – field
Thumb – motion of conductor
Central finger – direction of induced current.

TWO and THREE important questions

16) Explain Faraday coil magnet experiment.
Consider a Coil C1 connected to a
galvanometer.
When north pole of the magnet is moved
towards the coil the galvanometer needle
deflects in one direction.
When north pole of the magnet is
moved away the coil the galvanometer needle
deflects in opposite direction.
When the magnet is held stationary relative to the coil, no deflection is observed.
Also if the magnet is held stationary and the coil is moved towards or away from it, the needle
deflects.
Result.
Whenever there is a relative motion between a closed coil and magnet, induced current will be
produced in the coil. Induced current lasts as longer as the movement of the magnet with
respect to the coil continues.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 53

17) Explain Faraday coil coil experiment.

The bar magnet is replaced by a second
coil C2 connected to a battery.
When the coil C2 is moved towards the
coil C1, the galvanometer shows a deflection.
When the coil C2 is moved away from the
coil C1, the galvanometer shows a deflection
in opposite direction.
When C2 is held fixed and C1 is moved the
same effects are observed.
The deflection lasts as long as the coils are in relative motion.
Result-the relative motion between a current carrying coil and conducting coil induces current
in the conducting coil.

18) State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction.

The induced e.m.f is equal to the negative rate of change of flux through the coil.
𝒅ø
𝒆=−
𝒅𝒕
Where Φ is the flux linked to one turn
If the coil has N turns,
𝒅(𝑵ø)
𝐞=−
𝒅𝒕
Negative sign indicates that the induced current opposes any change according to Lenz’s law.

19) State Lenz’s law and mention its significance

The polarity of induced emf is such that it tends to produce a current which opposes the
change in magnetic flux that produced it.
Lenz’s law is based on the law of conservation of energy and it is useful to find the
direction of induced current.

20) What is motional e.m.f? Obtain an expression for motional e.m.f

The e.m.f induced in a conductor moving through a constant magnetic field is known as
motional e.m.f.

If the length RQ = x and RS = l,

The magnetic flux ΦB enclosed by the
loop PQRS will be
ΦB = Blx
Since x is changing with time, the rate of
change of flux ΦB will induce an emf given
by:
− 𝑑∅𝐵 −𝑑
𝜖= = Blx
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
− 𝑑𝑥
𝜖 = Blv where v =
𝑑𝑡
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 54
21) What is Self inductance?
It is defined as the negative induced e.m.f in the coil when the rate of change of current
in the coil is unity.
The S.I unit – henry

22) On what factors the self inductance depends?

Self induction depends upon,
1) the geometry of the coils
2) the number of turns of the coil
3) the medium inside the coils.

23) Define mutual inductance.

It is defined as the induced in the secondary coil when the rate of change of current in the
primary is unity.
The S.I unit – henry

24) On what factors the Mutual inductance depends on?

i) Distance between the coils
ii) Geometric shape of the coils
iii) Material of the core
iv) Angle between the axis of the coils.

25) Obtain an expression for energy stored in an inductor

If dw is the work done by the source to send a constant current i in the time dt, then
𝑑𝑤 𝑑𝑖
.= e.i. = L. .i
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡

dw = L I di
If W is the work done by the source to send constant current i continuously then
𝒊 𝒊 𝒊
𝒊𝟐
𝑾 = ∫ 𝒅𝒘 = ∫ 𝑳𝒊 𝒅𝒊 = 𝐋 ∫ 𝒊𝒅𝒊 = 𝑳
2
𝟎 𝟎 𝟎
This work done is stored in the form of energy of the inductor

Energy stored in an inductor

26) What is Alternating current generator? And mention its principle.

An electric generator is a device used to convert mechanical energy into electrical
energy. It is based on the principle of electromagnetic induction.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTRO MAGNETI INDUCTION 55
27) Draw the neat labeled diagram of AC generator

28) Obtain an expression for instantaneous e.m.f of AC

The initial flux through the coil is BAN but as the coil is rotating with angular velocity
w, at any instant of time t then flux is given by,
ф = BAN cosθ = BAN cos wt

Induced e.m.f,
𝒅ø 𝒅(𝐁𝐀𝐍 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝛚𝐭)
𝒆=− =−
𝒅𝒕 𝒅𝒕

when 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛚𝐭 = 1, induced e.m.f becomes maximum and let it be eo.

𝒆 = 𝐁𝐀𝐍𝛚 from equations (1) and (2)
e = eo sin wt
Therefore expression for induced emf e = eo sin wt

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 56
7.ALTERNATING CURRENT
1. What is Alternating current?
It is the current which varies periodically with time. ~
Circuit symbol of AC source is

2. Draw graphical representation of AC

V or I

Sinusoidal AC

3. What is sinusoidal AC?

The electric current whose magnitude changes with time and direction reverse periodically is
known as alternating current (OR) It is the Alternating Current which varies harmonically with time.

4. Define Cycle of AC.

Alternating current or voltage varies periodically with time. The cycle of AC is the complete
variation of current or voltage from zero to positive maximum then to negative maximum and back to
zero.

5. Define Period of AC (T).

It is the time taken by the AC to complete one cycle of variation.

6. Define Frequency of AC (f).

It is the number of cycles of AC in one second.

7. Define Phase of AC ().

It is the fraction of time period(T) that has elapsed since the current last passed its zero value
in the positive direction.

8. How to represent phase of AC at different instants.

V or I

3T/4 time

T/4 T/2 T

9. Define Instantaneous value of AC.

It is the value of alternating current at a given instant.
Consider I = Io sin t . where - angular frequency,
I  Instantaneous value of alternating current.

10. Define Peak value of AC

It is the maximum value attained by alternating current in either half cycle.
Consider I = Io sin t. Where Io  Peak value of alternating current.

11. What is Phasor diagram?

It is the diagram, which represents the phase relationships between AC and alternating voltage.
It is obtained by treating current and voltage as vectors.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ALTERNATING CURRENT 57
12. What is a pure Resistor( R)?
It is a resistor, which is free from induction effects.
A wire doubled on itself such that currents in the adjacent parts are in opposite direction is
almost a pure resistor.

13. What is a Pure inductor (L)?

It is a coil of negligible resistance.
A coil of a short length of thick copper wire wound on an iron core is almost a pure inductor.

14. Define Inductive reactance (XL).

It is the opposition offered by the coil to the flow of AC
XL = L = 2fL
OR
It is the ratio of rms value of voltage acros the coil to the rms value of current through the coil.
V
XL = rms Its SI unit is Ω
I rms

15. What is a Pure Capacitor?

It is a capacitor which is free from induction effects.

16. Define Capacitive reactance[XC ]?

It is the opposition offered by the capacitor to the flow of AC
1 1
XC = =
C 2fC
OR
It is the ratio of rms value of voltage across the capacitor to the rms value of current through
the capacitor.
V
XC = rms Its SI unit is  .
I rms

17. What is Impedance (Z)?

It is the opposition offered by the L.C.R. circuit to the flow of AC.
OR
It is the ratio of rms value of voltage across LCR circuit to the rms value of current through it.
V
Z = rms
I rms
18. What is Electrical resonance?
It is the situation in the LCR circuit at which current is maximum, when the inductive
reactance is equal to the capacitive reactance.
19. What is Resonant Circuit?
It is the LCR circuit in which the current is maximum, when the inductive reactance is equal to
the capacitive reactance.
At resonance, the phase difference between current and voltage is zero.
20. What is Resonant frequency of AC (fr)?
It is the frequency of applied AC to an LCR circuit for which current is maximum when
the inductive reactance is equal to the capacitive reactance.
21. What is the AC voltage and frequency for domestic purpose?
1) AC frequency applied for domestic purpose in India is 50Hz.
2) AC voltage supplied for domestic purpose in India is 220V.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ALTERNATING CURRENT 58
22. What are the characteristics or salient features of an LCR circuit in resonance:
At resonance
1) Inductive reactance is equal to the capacitive reactance.
2) Impedance is equal to the resistace of the circuit.
3) LCR circuit is pure resistance in nature.
4) Current is maximum.
5) Current is in phase with the applied voltage.
6) Phae difference between current and voltage is zero.
7) Power factor is equal to one ( Cos = 1)

23. Define Power in AC circuits.

It is the rate at which electrical energy is dissipated
24. Define Apparent Power (PA).
It is the power supplied by a source to the circuit. It is given by PA = Vrms x Irms
25. Define true Power (PT).
It is the power consumed by the circuit. Power in an AC circuit is given by
PT = Vrms x Irms cos

Where   Phase difference between V and I, cos  Power factor.

26. What are LC Oscillations?

Whenever energy is given to LC circuit, the electrical oscillations (Energy from capacitor to
inductor and vice versa) of definite frequency are generated. These oscillations are called LC
oscillations. During LC oscillations the total energy remains constant (Law of conservation of energy).

27. Mention the formula for Frequency and Total energy of LC oscillations.
1
1. Frequency of LC oscillation f =
2 LC
𝟏 𝒒𝟐 𝟏
2. Total energy of LC oscillation is given by UE = UC + UL  UE = 𝟐 + 𝟐 LI2
𝒄

28. Draw the circuit Symbol of transformer.

29. Define the Efficiency of transformer ().

It is the ratio of output power to the input power through the transformer.
Out put Power
i.e.  =
Input Power
For ideal transformer  = 1 i.e. Efficiency is 100%.
30. What is an ideal transformer?
It is the transformer in which output power is equal to the input power.

31. Distinguish between step up transformers and step down transformer:

Step up transformer Step down transformer
1 It is the transformer which increases It is the transformer which decreases
the AC voltage by decreasing the the AC voltage by increasing the

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 59
current. current
2 Primary voltage less than secondary Primary voltage greater than secondary
voltage voltage
3 Primary current greater than Primary current less than secondary
secondary voltage voltage
4 Primary number of turns less than Primary number of turns greater than
secondary number of turns secondary number of turns
5 Turns ratio greater than one Turns Ratio less than one.

TWO and THREE mark important questions

32. Define Mean value or average value of AC (I av OR Imean):
It is the mean of all the instantaneous values of AC taken in one half cycle.
𝟐 𝟐
𝐈𝐚𝐯 = 𝛑 𝐈𝐨 𝑽𝐚𝐯 = 𝛑 𝐕𝐨

33. Define Root mean square value or rms value: (I rms)

It is the square root of mean of the squares of all the instantaneous values of AC .taken over a
complete cycle
𝑰𝒐 𝑽𝒐
𝑰𝒓𝒎𝒔 = √𝟐 & 𝑽𝒓𝒎𝒔 = √𝟐

34. What is the releation between MEAN value and RMS Value of an AC.
Mean value of AC is calculated over half cycle and rms value is calculated over full cycle

2√2
Mean value = x rms Value Iav=0.9Irms OR Irms= 1.1 Iav
𝜋

35. Show that current and voltage are in phase in AC circuit containing a pure resistor:

R
Vo Vo
Io
t Io
~
Circuit Diagram Graphical Representation of V&I Phasor Diagram

The applied voltage is given by, V = Vo Sint  (1)

V
But the current through the resistor is I =  (2)
R
Vo sin t
From (1) and (2) I =
R
Vo
I = Io Sint (3) [Since= Io]
R
From equations (1) and (3), it follows that current and voltage are in phase.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 60

36. Distinguish between inductive reactance and capacitance reactance in an AC circuit.

Inductive Reactance Capacitive Reactance
1 It is the opposition offered by the coil to It is the opposition of offered by the
the flow of AC. capacitor to the flow of AC.
2 It is given by XL= 2fL It is given by XC =1/2fC
3 It increases with increase of inductance of It decreases with increase of capacitance of
the coil. the capacitor.
4 It increases with increase of frequency of It decreases with increase of frequency of
AC. AC.

37. Mention the condition for resonance and hence obtain expression for resonant frequency.
Condition for resonance:
At resonance current(I) is maximum and Z is minimum.
Z is minimum when XC = XL
i.e Inductive reactance = the capacitive reactance

Expression for resonant frequency

At resonance capacitive reactance=Inductive reactance
XC = XL
1
= L
C
1
= 2fL
2fC
1
f2 =
4 2 LC
1
Resonant frequency, fr =
2 LC

38. Define power factor (Cos) and mention its formula.

It is the ratio of true power to the apparent power.
True power, PT = Vrms x Irms x Cos
PT = PA Cos Since Vrms x Irms = PA
PT R
Cos = =
PA Z

39. What are the power factor of AC circuits containing pure resistor, inductor, capacitor
and series LCR circuits?
1) AC circuit with pure resistor, cos = 1
2) AC circuit with pure inductor, cos = 0
3) AC circuit with pure capacitor, cos = 0
4) AC LCR circuit, cos = R/Z
5) AC LCR circuit at resonance. cos = 1 [since LCR circuit is pure resistance in nature]

40. What is wattles current?

It is the current for which the power dissipation in the circuit is zero.
Ex: The current through a pure inductor circuit or pure capacitor circuit. (PT = PA x Cos0 = 0 )

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 61
41. What is a transformer? Mention its principle.
It is a device used to increase or decrease AC voltage. It increases the AC voltage by
decreasing current and vice versa.
It is based on the principle of mutual induction.

42. What is Step up and step down transformer?

Step up is the transformer which increases the AC volage by decreasing the current.
Step down is the transformer which decreases the AC voltage by increasing the current.

43. Mention the different losses in a transformer:

1) Loss due to heating
2) Loss due to flux leakage
3) Loss due to eddy currents
4) Hysteresis loss.

FIVE marks important questions

44. Show that voltage leads the current by /2 in AC circuit containing a pure inductor.
L
V0
I0 V0
t
Io
~

Circuit Diagram Graphical representation of V&I Phasor Diagram

The applied voltage V is given by V = Vo Sint. ---->(1)

dI
e.m.f. induced in the coil is given by e = -L -----> (2) Where L  Self inductance.
dt
From Kirchooff’s Voltage law V+e= 0 [Since IR = 0]
 e = - V -----> (3)
dI
From (2) and (3), L =V
dt
V Vo
dI = dt = sint dt. [Since V = Vo Sint]
L L
Vo
 dI =  L sint dt.
Vo   cost 
I =
L   
Vo
I= [ sin (t-90)] [since -cost = sin(t-90)
L
I = Io [Sin (t-/2)] -----> (4)
Vo
Where Io = is Peak Value of Current,
L
From equations (1) & (4), it follows that voltage leads the current by /2.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 62
45. Show that the current leads the voltage by /2 in AC circuit containing a pure capacitor.

C V0
I0 Vo
t
~ Io

Circuit Diagram Graphical representation of V&I Phasor Diagram

The applied voltage V is given by V = Vo sint -----> (1)

dq
We have Instantaneous Current, I =
dt
d d
I= CV = (CVo sint) [since q = CV, V = Vo sint]
dt dt
d
= CVo sint = CVo cost . 
dt
Vo
= CVo cost = [Sin (t + /2)] [since cost = sin (t+90)]
1
C
V
I = Io Sin (t+/2) ----> (2) Where Io = o is Peak value of current,
1
C
From equation (1) & (2), it follows that current leads the voltage by /2 or voltage
lags behind the current by /2.

46. Derive an expression for resultant voltage, current and Impedance in LCR Circuit:

L
C R VL
A
VL
I V
VR B
I VC I O φ I
(V -V )
C L
~ V
A
C
VC

If VC > VL, then (VC-VL) is the resultant of VL and VC and is in th direction of VC.
Let OC represents the resultant (VC-VL) and VR respectively.
Let  be the phase angle between V and I.

From Triangle OCB, OC2 = OB2 + CB2

V2 = VR2 + (VC-VL)2
V2 = (IR)2 + [(IXC)-(IXL)]2
V2 = I2 [ R2 + (XC-XL)2]
V = I R2  ( X C  X L )2 ---- Resultant voltage

V
I ----- Resultant current
R  ( X C - X L )2
2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ALTERNATING CURRENT 63
V
And Impedance Z  = R2  ( X C  X L )2
I
Z = R2  ( X C  X L )2 ---- Resultant impedence

To find the direction of resultant Voltage ()

CB
From the Triangle OBC, tan  =
OC

VC  VL V  VL  X  XL 
tan  = ==>  = tan-1  C  or  = tan-1  C 
VR  VR   R 

47. Explain the construction and working of transformer.

Construction of transformer

Step up transformer

It consists of two coils ‘P’ and ‘S’ of insulated copper wire wound on opposite arms of the
rectangular laminated iron core. The core is in the form of laminas and insulated from one another.
‘P’ is the primary coil to which input voltage is applied and ‘S’ is the secondary coil across which
output voltae is obtained. In a step up transformer, the primary coil consists of thick wire and few
number of turns when compared to secondary coil. It is just opposite in step down transformer.

Working and Theory of transformer

If VP and VS are the voltages across primary coil of turns NP and secondary coil of turns NS
respectively, then for any transformer it is found that

VS N
= S = T ----->(1) Where T is called turns ratio.
VP NP
If IP and IS are currents through primary and secondary respectively, then for an ideal transformer

Input power = Output power

VP IP = VS IS

VS I
===> = P -----> (2)
VP IS

VS N I
From (1) and (2) we get = S = P =T
VP NP IS

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 64
8. ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
1. Mention the inconsistency in ampere’s circuital law.
Ampere circuital law fail to determine the magnetic field produced by displacement current
which is due to time varying electric field is inconsistency in Ampere’s circuital law
Thus according to Maxwell, the time-varying electric field across the capacitor plates gives rise
to the magnetic field. Thus Ampere’s circuital law is modified as ∮ ⃗𝑩 ⃗ . ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝒅𝒍 = µ𝒐 (𝑰𝒄 + 𝑰𝑫 )
𝒅𝝋𝑬
= µ𝒐 (𝑰 + 𝝐𝒐 )
𝒅𝒕
known as Ampere-Maxwell law.
2. Mention the need for displacement current.
To determine magnetic field produced due by time varying electric field.
3. Mention Ampere`s - Maxwell equations
𝒅𝝋
Ampere-Maxwell law ⃗ . ⃗⃗⃗⃗
∮ ⃗𝑩 𝒅𝒍 = µ𝒐 (𝑰 + 𝝐𝒐 𝑬 )
𝒅𝒕

4. What is the difference between conduction current and displacement current?

Conduction current is due to flow of charges and displacement current is due to change in
electric flux.
5. What is an electromagnetic wave?
Electromagnetic wave is a combination of time varying electric and magnetic fields.
These two fields are perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to the direction of
propagation of wave.
6. What is the source of electromagnetic waves?
Accelerated charges are the source for electromagnetic waves.
7. What is Poynting vector?
Poynting vector represents the rate at which energy flows through unit surface
⃗⃗ ×𝑩
𝑬 ⃗⃗
⃗ =
perpendicular to the direction of wave propagation. It is given by 𝑺
𝝁𝒐
8. What is Electromagnetic spectrum?
The classification or arrangement of electromagnetic waves according to increasing or
decreasing order of their wavelengths or frequencies is known as electromagnetic spectrum.
9. Mention the order of electromagnetic waves.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 65
TWO and THREE mark important questions
10. What is displacement current? Mention the expression for displacement current
The current which is due to time-varying electric fields is known as the displacement
current.
𝒅𝝋𝑬
𝑰 𝑫 = 𝝐𝒐
𝒅𝒕
𝒅𝝋𝑬
𝜀0 is the permittivity of free space, is the rate of change of electric flux
𝒅𝒕

11. Mention the characterstics of electromagnetic waves.

 The electromagnetic waves originate from accelerated charges
 The electric and magnetic fields in an electromagnetic wave are perpendicular to each
other
𝟏
 The speed of electromagnetic wave is given by, 𝒄 = = 3 x 108 m/s in air or vaccum
√𝝁𝒐 𝝐𝒐
 Light is an electromagnetic wave. These are non mechanical waves
 They are transverse in nature
 Since electromagnetic waves do not carry any charge, they are not deflected by electric
and magnetic fields

12. What are Radio waves? And mention any 2 applications of it.
These are the electromagnetic waves having Wavelength greater than 0.3m &
Frequency – 500 KHz to 1000 MHz
Applications
1) They are used in radio and television communication systems.
2) Cellular phones use radio waves to transmit voice communication in UHF (ultra high
frequency) band – 300 MHz to 3000 MHz
13. What are Micro waves? And mention any two applications of it.
These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength range of 0.1mm to 1mm &
Frequency – 109 to 3x1011Hz.
Applications
1) Used in RADAR (Radio Detection and Ranging) they can penetrate through fog &
snow.
2) Used in microwave ovens.
3) Used in aircraft navigation.

14. What are Infrared waves? And mention any two applications of it.
These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength range of 1mm to 700nm &
Frequency- 3x1011Hz to 4x1014 Hz.
Applications

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES 66
1) Used in satellites both for military purposes and to observe growth of crops.
2) Used in remote switches of household electronic systems.
3) Used in solar cookers and solar heaters.

15. What is Visible light?

These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength range of 700 nm to 400nm &
Frequency- 4x 1014Hz to 7x 1014Hz.
16. What are Ultraviolet waves? And mention any two applications of it
These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength 400 nm to 1nm &
Frequency – 7.5 x 1014Hz to 5x 1017Hz.
Applications
1) Used in eye surgery.
2) Used in water purifiers to kill germs.
3) Used in forensic labs to detect forgeries.
17. What are X- Rays? And mention any two applications of it
These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength 1nm to 10-3nm &
Frequency – 3x 1016 to 3x 1020Hz.
Applications
1) Used in treatment of certain forms of cancer.
2) Used in study of crystal structures.
3) Used in security check-ups.
18. What are Gamma Rays? And mention any two applications of it
These are the electromagnetic waves Wavelength less than 10-3nm &
Frequency- 3x 1018Hz to 3x 1022HZ.
Applications
1) Used to study structure of nucleus of atoms.
2) Used to detect flaws or tiny cracks in finished goods.
3) Used to destroy cancerous cells or tumors.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 67
9-RAY OPTICS
1. Define Reflection of light.
The change in the path of light within the same medium is called reflection.

2. State Laws of reflection -

1) Angle of reflection is equal to angle of incidence (r = i).
2) The incident ray, the reflected ray and the normal at the
point of incidence lies in the same plane.
3. Mention Properties of image formed by plane mirror
Image formed by the plane mirror is of,
 Same size of the object
 Formed at same distance of object
 Erect, Virtual & Laterally inverted.
4. What are Spherical mirrors?
A spherical mirror is a part of hollow sphere, whose one side is reflecting and other side is opaque.

5. What are the two types of spherical mirrors?

1) Concave mirror
The mirror whose reflecting surface is towards the centre of the sphere.
2) Convex mirror
The mirror whose reflecting surface is away from the centre of the sphere.

6. Define Centre of curvature of mirror(C).

The centre of the sphere of which the mirror is a part is called centre of curvature.

7. Define Pole of a mirror (P).

The middle or centre point of the spherical mirror is called pole.

8. Define Radius of curvature of mirror (R).

The radius of the sphere of which the mirror is a part is called radius of curvature.

9. Define Principal axis of a spherical mirror

The line joining the pole and the centre of curvature of the mirror is called principal axis of the mirror.

10. Define Principal focus (F) of a spherical mirror.

The point at which, a narrow beam of light incident on the mirror parallel to its principal axis, after
reflection from the mirror, meets or appears to come from is called principal focus of the mirror. It is
represented by F.
11. Define Focal length (f) of a spherical mirror.
The distance between the pole and the principal focus of the mirror is called focal length. It is
denoted by f.

12. draw the ray diagram representing Principal axis, principal focus, focal length of a spherical mirror:

C P P C
F F
Principle axis

Converges the light rays Diverges the light rays

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 68

13. What are the properties of image formed by the spherical mirror
Mirror Location of Location of the Magnification, Nature
the object image Size of the
image Real Erect
virtual inverted
(a) Concave At infinity At focus i.e. v = f m<<-1, Real inverted
i.e. u = ∞ diminished
Away from Between f and 2f m < -1, diminished Real inverted
centre of i.e.
curvature (u f < v < 2f
> 2f)
C F P
 At centre of At centre of m =-1, same size as Real inverted
curvature u = curvature i.e. v = that of the object
2f 2f
Between Away from the m > -1, magnified Real inverted
centre of centre of curvature
curvature v > 2f
and focus :
F < u < 2f
At focus i.e. u At infinity i.e. v = m = -∞, magnified Real inverted
=f ∞
Between pole v>u m > +1 magnified Virtual erect
and focus u <
f
(b) Convex At infinity i.e. At focus i.e., v = f m< +1, diminished Virtual erect
u=∞
P F C Anywhere

between Between pole and
m< +1, diminished Virtual erect
infinity and focus
pole

14. Derive mirror formula for Concave mirror.

From figure, Δ FA′B′ and Δ FEN are similar triangles.

𝐸𝑁
From Δ FEN, tan α = 𝐹𝑁
𝐴′ 𝐵 ′
From Δ FA′B′, tan α = 𝐴′ 𝐹

𝐸𝑁 𝐴′ 𝐵 ′
=
𝐹𝑁 𝐴′ 𝐹
𝐸𝑁 𝐴′ 𝐵 ′
= 𝐴′ 𝑃−𝐹𝑃 [since FN ≈ FP and FA’= A’P-FP]
𝐹𝑃
𝐴𝐵 𝐴′ 𝐵 ′
= 𝐴′ 𝑃−𝐹𝑃 [Since EN = AB]
𝐹𝑃

𝐴′ 𝐵 ′ 𝐴′ 𝑃−𝐹𝑃
= --------- (1)
𝐴𝐵 𝐹𝑃

From figure, Δ PAB and Δ PA′B′ are similar triangles.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 69
𝐴𝐵 𝐴′ 𝐵 ′
tan 𝜃 = 𝐴𝑃 = 𝐴′ 𝑃

𝐴′ 𝐵 ′ 𝐴′𝑃
= --------- (2)
𝐴𝐵 𝐴𝑃

From (1) and (2)

𝐴′𝑃 𝐴′ 𝑃−𝐹𝑃 𝐴′ 𝑃
= = −1
𝐴𝑃 𝐹𝑃 𝐹𝑃

But AP = -u, A’P = -v and FP = -f then

−𝑣 −𝑣
= −𝑓 − 1
−𝑢
𝑣 𝑣
+1 =𝑓
𝑢
1 1 𝑣 1 1
= 𝑣 [𝑢 + 1] = 𝑢 + 𝑣
𝑓
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
=𝒖+𝒗
𝒇

This is the mirror formula for u, v and f.

15. Define Magnification.

The ratio of size of image to size of object is called magnification.
𝒔𝒊𝒛𝒆 𝒐𝒇 𝒊𝒎𝒂𝒈𝒆
𝒎 = 𝒔𝒊𝒛𝒆 𝒐𝒇 𝒐𝒃𝒋𝒆𝒄𝒕
−𝒗
𝒎= (For mirrors)
𝒖
𝒇 𝒇−𝒗
Note – 1) In terms of u and f, 𝒎 = . 2) In terms of v and f, 𝒎 =
𝒇−𝒖 𝒇

16. What is Refraction of light?

The change in the path of light as it goes from one medium to another medium is called refraction.

17. State first Law of refraction.

The incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal to the refracting surface at the point of incidence lie
in the same plane.

18. Define Absolute refractive index (n)

The ratio of velocity of light in vacuum to velocity of light in a medium is called absolute refractive
𝒄
index of the medium. 𝒏 = 𝒗
19. Define Relative refractive index (1n2)
The ratio of velocity of light in first medium to velocity of light in second medium with respect to first
𝒗
medium. 𝒏𝟐 = 𝒗𝟏
𝟐

20. When a light travels from one medium to another medium which physical quantity remains same?
Frequency remains same.
21. Define Lateral shift
The perpendicular distance between incident ray
produced and emergent ray is called lateral shift.
𝒕
𝑳𝑺 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧(𝒊 − 𝒓)
𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝒓

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 70
22. On what factors Lateral shift depends?
1) Refractive index of the media.
2) Thickness of the medium.
3) Angle of incidence

23. When lateral shift is is minimum and maximum?

1) For normal incidence lateral shift is zero (minimum).
2) For grazing incidence lateral shift is maximum.
24. Define Normal shift
The apparent shift in the position of an object in one
medium viewed normally from the other medium is
called normal shift.
𝟏
𝑵𝑺 = 𝒕 (𝟏 − 𝒏)

25. On what factors normal shift depends?

a) Thickness of the medium
b) Refractive index of the medium.
26. what is the Relation between critical angle and refractive index
𝟏
𝒏 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒄

27. Define Power of a lens

The power of the lens is its ability to converge or diverge a ray of light passing through it.
The power of a lens is defined as the reciprocal of its focal length in meter.
𝟏
𝑷 = 𝒇 where f is in metres.
The unit of power is Dioptre.

28. Define the SI unit of power of a lens.

“The power of lens is said to be 1D if its focal length is 1m”.

29. Mention the expressions for equivalent focal length for two thin lens separated by distance d.

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝒅
= + −
𝒇 𝒇𝟏 𝒇𝟐 𝒇𝟏 𝒇𝟐
30. What is a prism?
A prism is a homogenous optical medium bounded by three rectangular and two triangular surfaces.
Two rectangular surfaces are well polished and are called refracting surfaces. The third, rectangular surface
is grounded and is called base of the prism. The angle between two refracting surfaces is called angle of the
prism.

31. Mention the conditions at minimum deviation

1) At minimum deviation, the ray passes symmetrically through the prism.
2) At minimum deviation the refracted ray is parallel to the base of prism.
𝐴
3) For all colours at minimum deviation, 𝑟 = 𝑟1 = 𝑟2 = 2 & i = e

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 71
32. Draw the schematic diagram of refracting telescope and mention its magnification formula.

It is an optical instrument which is used to see

the distant objects clearly and magnified.

Magnification
𝑓
𝑀 = 𝑓𝑜
𝑒

33. Draw the schematic diagram of cassegrain telescope and mention its magnification formula.

TWO and THREE mark important questions

R
34. Show that f = in the case of concave mirror.
2
𝑀𝐷 𝑀𝐷
From ΔCMD, tan 𝜃 = , ΔFMD tan2 𝜃 =
𝐶𝐷 𝐹𝐷

For small angles, tan θ ≈ θ, tan2 θ ≈ 2 θ

𝑀𝐷 𝑀𝐷
𝜃= , 2𝜃 =
𝐶𝐷 𝐹𝐷

𝐶𝐷
(Or) FD = 2
Now, for small θ , the point D is very close to the point P.

Therefore, FD = f and CD = R.
𝑹
𝒇= 𝟐

35. state New Cartesian sign conventions

1) All distances should be measured from the pole of the mirror.
2) The distances measured in the direction of light are taken as positive and taken as positive and
opposite to direction of light are taken as negative.
3) The heights measured perpendicular to principal axis in upward direction are considered as positive,
while those measured in downward direction are taken as negative.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 72
36. State and explain Second law of refraction or (Snell’s law of refraction) and mention its limitation.
The ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is a constant, for a
given pair of media and for a given wavelength of light.
𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒊
= 𝒄𝒐𝒏𝒔𝒕𝒂𝒏𝒕
𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒓
This is known as Snell’s law. The constant in the equation is called refractive index (n or µ) of the second
medium with respect to first medium (1n2)
𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒊 𝒏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒊
𝒏𝟐 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒓 ⟹ 𝒏𝟐 = 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒓
𝟏
𝒏𝟏 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒊 = 𝒏𝟐 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝒓

 Snell’s law is not applicable for normal incidence of light.

37. Define Critical angle and Total internal reflection.

Critical angle It is the angle of incidence for which angle of refraction is 90 0 when ray travels from
denser to rarer medium.
Total internal reflection
When a ray of light travels
from denser medium to rarer
medium and if the angle of incidence
greater than critical angle, light
reflects back to the same medium.
This phenomenon is called total
internal reflection.

38. What are the conditions for TIR?

 The ray must travel from
denser to rarer medium
 The angle of incidence must
be greater than critical angle

39. Mention the Applications of total internal reflection
(i) Sparkling Diamonds
(ii) Reflecting Prisms
(iii) Optical fiber
40. Mention the Uses of optical fibers.
1) Optical fibers are used in the manufacture of medical instruments called endoscopes.
2) They are used in telecommunications for transmitting audio and video signals to long distances.
3) These are used to transmit the images of the objects.
4) Optical fibers are used to form toys.

41. Draw the schematic diagram of Simple microscope

and mention its magnification formula.

The linear magnification m, for the image

formed at the near point D is
𝐷
𝑀=1+𝑓

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 73
42. Draw the schematic diagram of compound microscope and mention its magnification formula.

It consists of two convex lenses co-axially

separated by some distance of objective and
eye piece.

The total magnification when the

image is formed at infinity, is

𝐿 𝐷
𝑀 = 𝑓 [𝑓 ]
𝑜 𝑒

FIVE mark important questions

43. Derive the relation between n, u, v and R for a spherical surface.

From triangles∠𝑂𝐴𝐼 & ∠𝐴𝐶𝐼

i = α + γ, r = γ – β ----------- (1)
𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
tan 𝛼 = 𝑀𝑂 , tan 𝛽 = 𝑀𝐼 & tan 𝛾 = 𝑀𝐶

For small angles tan θ ≈ θ

𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
Therefore 𝛼 = 𝑀𝑂 𝛽= 𝛾= ------ (2)
𝑀𝐼 𝑀𝐶

From eq (1) & (2)

𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
i=α+γ= + 𝑀𝐶 ----------- (3)
𝑀𝑂

𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
r = γ – β = 𝑀𝐶 − ------------ (4)
𝑀𝐼

According to Snell’s law 𝑛1 𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑖 = 𝑛2 sin 𝑟

For small angles sin θ ≈ θ

Therefore 𝑛1 𝑖 = 𝑛2 𝑟 ------------- (5)

Substitute (3) and (4) in (5)

𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
𝑛1 [ 𝑀𝑂 + 𝑀𝐶 ] = 𝑛2 [𝑀𝐶 – 𝑀𝐼 ]

𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴 𝑀𝐴
𝑛1 [𝑃𝑂+𝑃𝑀 + 𝑃𝐶−𝑃𝑀] = 𝑛2 [𝑃𝐶−𝑃𝑀 – 𝑃𝐼−𝑃𝑀 ]

PM is small as compare to other distances, so it is neglected.

𝑛1 𝑛1 𝑛2 𝑛2
+ = −
𝑃𝑂 𝑃𝐶 𝑃𝐶 𝑃𝐼

By using Cartesian sign convention

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 74
PO = -u, PI = v and PC = R
𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏
− + =
𝒖 𝒗 𝑹

𝐧𝟐 𝐧𝟏 𝐧𝟐 −𝐧𝟏
− =
𝐯 𝐮 𝐑

Note:
𝐧𝟏 𝐧𝟐 𝐧𝟏 −𝐧𝟐
If the ray of light travels from denser to rarer medium then − = .
𝐯 𝐮 𝐑

44. Derive Lens maker’s formula

Lens is an optical medium

bounded by two surfaces of which one
surface must be spherical

The formation of image can be considered in

two stages.

REFRACTION THROUGH 1ST FACE ABC(N1)

:

In the absence of the 2nd surface ADC

I1 be the real image of O
Form the equation of refraction at spherical surface,
𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 −𝑛
− 𝑢1 + 𝑣2 = 2𝑅 1
1
𝑛1 𝑛 𝑛2 −𝑛1
Then − + 𝑣2 = ------------- (1)
𝑢 1 𝑅1

REFRACTION THROUGH 2ND SURFACE ADC(N2) :

In the absence of the 1st surface ABC

I1 serves as virtual object and I is the real image.
From the equation of a spherical surface
𝑛 𝑛 𝑛 −𝑛 −(𝑛2 −𝑛1)
− 2+ 1= 1 2= -------------- (2)
𝑣1 𝑣 𝑅2 𝑅2
By adding equations
𝑛 𝑛 1 1
− 𝑢1 + 𝑣1 = (𝑛2 − 𝑛1 ) (𝑅 − 𝑅 )
1 2

1 1 𝑛 1 1
− 𝑢 + 𝑣 = (𝑛2 − 1) (𝑅 − 𝑅 )
1 1 2

1 1 1 1
− 𝑢 + 𝑣 = ( 𝑛2 − 1) ( 𝑅 − 𝑅 )
1 2

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
= ( 𝒏𝟐 − 𝟏) (𝑹 − 𝑹 )
𝒇 𝟏 𝟐

This is known as Lens maker’s formula.

1 1 1
Where = −
𝑓 𝑣 𝑢

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 75
45. Expression for equivalent focal length of two thin lenses in contact.

The formation of the image can be considered in two stages,

1. REFRACTION THROUGH LENS A
In the absence of second lens B, I1 is the real image of O.
Form the lens formula,
1 −1 1
= 𝑢 + 𝑣 ----------- (1)
𝑓
1 1
Where u is object distance and v1 is image
distance.

2. REFRACTION THROUGH LENS B

In the absence of L1 I1 serves as virtual object and I
is the real image.
From the lens formula,
1 1 1
= − v + v ---------- (2)
f
2 1
Adding (1) and (2)
1 1 1 1
+ 𝑓 = − 𝑢 + 𝑣 ----------- (3)
𝑓
1 2
The combination of lenses can be replaced by a single lens called effective or equivalent lens, which
produces the same effect as that of the combination.
If F is the focal length of the equivalent lens then,
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
= − 𝒖 + 𝒗 ------------ (4)
𝑭
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
From (3) and (4) =𝒇 +𝒇
𝑭 𝟏 𝟐

Thus, the reciprocal effective focal length of number of lenses in contact is equal to the sum of the
reciprocals of the individual focal lengths.

Effective power P = P1 + P2

46. Derive an expressions for refractive index of a prism in terms of angle of the prism and of minimum
deviation.
ABC – it is the principal section of a prism of angle A and refractive index n placed in air.
From the Δ QTR
Exterior angle = sum of the interior
opposite angles
d = (i - r1) + (e - r2)
d = (i + e) - (r1+ r2) ------------ (1)
From quadrilateral AQOR
𝐴̂ + 𝑄̂ + 𝑂̂ + 𝑅̂ = 3600
But
𝑄̂ + 𝑅̂ = 1800
𝐴̂ + 𝑂̂ = 1800 ------------ (2)
From the Δ OQR
𝑟1 + 𝑟2 + 𝑂̂ = 1800 -------------- (3)
From (ii) and (iii)
𝑨 = 𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 --------- (4)
Form (i) and (iv)
d = (i + e) – A ---------- (5)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

RAY OPTICS 76

AT MINIMUM DEVIATION (D)

d = D or Dm
i= e = i ------------- (6)
r1 = r2 = r (say)
From (4) and (5)
A = r + r = 2r
𝐴
𝑟=2
D = (i + i) – A
𝐴+𝐷
A + D = 2i Or 𝑖 = 2
From Snell’s law
sin 𝑖
𝑛 = sin 𝑟
Substituting for i and r,
𝑨+𝑫
𝐬𝐢𝐧( )
𝟐
𝒏= 𝑨
𝐬𝐢𝐧( 𝟐 )

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 77
10.WAVE OPTICS
1. Define the terms Wave Front & Ray:
The continuous locus of all the particles of the medium which are vibrating in the same
phase is called wave front.

The energy of the wave travels in a direction perpendicular to the wave front and this
direction is called a ray..

2. Explain Huygens’s principle:

Explanation: Consider the diverging spherical wave moving through a medium.
At t = 0 the spherical wavefront has the position AB. Secondary wavelets originating
from every point on this wavefront travel in all directions with the same speed V and
in a time t they develop into a sphere of radius Vt. The tangential surface CD drawn
to all these spheres in the forward direction gives the shape and position of the new
wavefront after a time t. same process takes place in the case of a plane wavefront.
Here envelopes CD and EF are termed as forward secondary wavefront and backward
secondary wavefront. Huygen assumed that the backward secondary wavelets does not
exist at all.
A
E C
A C
•
E •
• •

S
• •
• • New wavefront
• New wavefront
F
•
B D
F D
B

3. Derive Snell’s law based on

Huygens’s wave theory of light
when light travels from rarer to
denser medium
By geometry 𝐵𝐴̂𝐶 = i & E𝐶̂ 𝐴 = r
𝐵𝐶
From Δle BAC & Δle ECA, sini = ,
𝐴𝐶
𝐴𝐸
& sinr =
𝐴𝐶
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑖 𝐵𝐶/𝐴𝐶 𝐵𝐶 𝑣1
= = = ------- (1)
𝑠𝑖𝑛𝑟 𝐴𝐸/𝐴𝐶 𝐴𝐸 𝑣2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 78
𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝑖 𝑛2 1
= (Since v 𝛼 )
𝑆𝑖𝑛 𝑟 𝑛1 𝑛

n1 sin i = n2 sin r
This represents Snell’s law of refraction.

4. Derive the law of Reflection of plane wave by a plane surface using Huygens principle:
Every point on the
wavefront AB is a source of
secondary wavelets. Let the
secondary wavelets from B strike
the surface MN at C in a time t.
then BC= vt. The secondary
wavelet from A will travel the same
distance vt in the same time. With
A as centre and vt as radius, draw
an arc. The tangent from C touches
this arc at E and CE is the tangential surface touching all the spheres of reflected secondary
wavelets. CE is the reflected wavefront and r be the angle of reflection. Δ les AEC and BAC
are congruent. Therefore i = r. thus during reflection of light angle of incidence is equal to the
angle of reflection.

5. Define Interference of light:

The modification in the distribution of light energy due to the superposition of light
waves from two coherent sources is called Interference.
Note:
1. The colour pattern observed on soap bubbles, oil spills on wet roads and bright colours
produced on spider webs when exposed to sunlight are due to interference of light.
2. During interference, there is transfer of energy from one region reappears at the other.
Hence light energy is conserved.
6. What are Coherent sources?
Two sources are said to be coherent if they emit light waves of
a. Same wavelength, same frequency
b. Nearly equal amplitude and
c. Same phase or constant phase difference
7. What are the methods to obtain Coherent sources?
1. By division of wavefront: Young’s double slit experiment, Fresnel’s bi prism, Lloyd’s
mirror etc.
2. By division of amplitude: Interference at thin film, Newton’s rings etc.
8. Mention the expression to find resultant intensities of two interfering waves.
I = I1 + I2 + 2 √𝐼1 𝐼2 cos 𝜙 where 𝜙 is the phase difference.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 79
9. Describe Young’s double slit experiment.
Thomas Young established the wave nature of light by showing that light waves can
interfere with each other. The experimental arrangement is as shown in the figure. Light from
a monochromatic source is incident on a screen X which has a narrow slit S. the spherical
wave fronts emerging from S falls on the screen Y which contain two close narrow parallel
slits S1 and S2 at equal distance from S. S1 and S2 act as individual sources which are in phase
and hence they behave like coherent sources.

The spherical wave fronts emerging from S1 and S2 interfere with each other and
produce interference pattern on a screen. The interference pattern consists of alternate bright
and dark bands parallel to the slits. They are also known as interference fringes.
Thick lines represent the crests and dotted lines represent troughs. The intersection of
two thick lines or dotted lines i.e., waves arriving in phase corresponds to a bright band on
the screen. Intersection of a thick line and a dotted line i.e, waves arriving in out of phase
corresponds to a dark band on the screen. All dark fringes have zero intensity.

10. What is Diffraction?

The phenomenon of bending nature of light around the edges of a sharp obstacle
whose size is comparable to wavelength of light is called diffraction.
11. Explain Diffraction of light at a single slit:
A monochromatic source of light S is placed at the principal focus of convex lens L1. The
emergent parallel beam or plane wavefront xy is incident on a narrow slit AB of width a.
After diffraction light is made to fall on another convex lens L2. The diffraction pattern is
obtained on a screen placed at the principal focus of lens L2.

Second secondary maxima

P First secondary maxima

x A 
Central maxima

O
S
c N
First minima
y

L1 L2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
WAVE OPTICS 80
The diffraction pattern on the screen can be explained by using Huygens principle.
The diffraction pattern consists of a central bright band of decreasing intensity on either side.
AN is a perpendicular drawn from A to the ray diffracted from B. The path difference
between the secondary waves from A and B reaching the point ‘P’ is equal to BN
From right angled triangle ANB
Sin  = BN/AB  BN = AB sin 

Path difference Δx = a sin  ∵AB = a, is the slit width

12. What is Polarization?

The phenomenon by which the vibrations of light wave are restricted to a particular plane
in called polarisation.

13. What is unpolarised light?

In an ordinary light, the vibration of light occur normal to the direction of propagation
in all possible planes. Such a beam light is called unpolarised light.

14. What is plane Polarised light?

If the vibrations are confined to only one
plane then it is called plane polarized or linearly
polarized light.

15. Define the terms Plane of vibration and plane of polarisation.

The plane containing the direction of vibration and direction of propagation of light is
called plane of vibration (ABCD).
The plane which is perpendicular to the plane of vibration and contains the direction
of propagation of light is called plane of polarisation (EFGH).
The plane of vibration and plane of polarisation are perpendicular to each other.
A B

E F

ABCD  Plane of vibration

Unpolarised EFGH  Plane of
light H G Polarisation

C D

16. What are Polaroid’s?

Polaroid is a thin sheet of specially prepared plastic material used to produce and
analyze plane polarized light.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 81
17. Explain the working of Polaroid.
A Polaroid consists of long chain molecules aligned in a particular direction. When
light is passed through a Polaroid, the electric vector in the direction of aligned molecules
gets absorbed. The electric vector perpendicular to the direction of aligned molecules is
unaffected.
When unpolarised light is passed through a Polaroid, we get linearly polarized light
with electric vector in a direction perpendicular to the aligned molecules.

TWO and THREE marks important questions

18. Define the terms Wave Front & Ray:
The continuous locus of all the particles of the medium which are vibrating in the same
phase is called wave front.

19. Mention the types of wave fronts.

1. Spherical wave front( due to point source)
2. Cylindrical wave front (due to linear slit)
3. Plane wave front ( due to point source and linear slit at infinite distance)

S
S

Plane wave front

Spherical wave front
Cylindrical wave front

20. State & explain Huygens’s principle:

Huygens’s principle is based on the following assumptions :
1. Every point on a wavefront is a source of secondary disturbance which produces
secondary wavelets. These wavelets are spherical and travel with the speed of light in
all directions.
2. The new wave front at any later time is obtained by taking the tangential surface in the
forward direction to all the spheres of secondary wavelets.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 82
21. Mention an expression for distance of bright fringe & dark fringe from central fringe in
interference.
𝑛𝜆𝐷
For bright fringe xn = n = 0, 1, 2, ...
𝑑
(2𝑛+1)𝜆𝐷
For dark fringe xn = n = 0, 1, 2, ...
2𝑑

22. Mention the conditions for Central maxima, secondary maxima and secondary minima of
diffraction
It is observed that the intensity has a central maximum at 𝜽 = 0
(𝒏+𝟏 )𝝀
and other secondary maxima at 𝜽 ≈ , which go on becoming weaker and weaker
𝟐𝒂
with increasing n.
𝒏𝝀
The minima (zero intensity) are at 𝜽 ≈ n = ±1, ±2, ±3, ....
𝒂

23. State and explain Malus’Law.

When a beam of completely plane polarized light passed through analyzer, the
intensity of transmitted light is directly proportional to the square of the cosine of the angle
between the pass axis of polarizer and analyzer.
i.e I = I0 Cos2 Ѳ Where Io = Intensity of light emerged from polarizer
I = Intensity of light emerged from analyzer
𝜃 = Angle between pass axis of polarizer and analyzer

24. Mention the Uses of Polaroids.

1. Polaroids are widely used in goggles or sunglasses to reduce glare.
2. Polaroids are used as windows in buses & trains to vary the intensity of light.
3. Polaroids are used to view 3-D pictures and movies
4. In photography, they are used to eliminate the glare of reflected light.

25. Give Theory of interference & mention the conditions for constructive interference and
destructive interference.
Consider two light waves having the displacements
y1 = a cos 𝜔𝑡
y2 = a cos (𝜔𝑡 + 𝜙)
Then resultant displacement y = y1+ y2
y = a [cos 𝜔𝑡 + cos (𝜔𝑡 + 𝜙)]
∅ ∅ 𝐴+𝐵 𝐴−𝐵
y = 2a cos ( ) cos (𝜔𝑡 + ) [ ∵ cos A + cos B = 2cos ( ) cos ( )]
2 2 2 2
The amplitude of the resultant displacement is
𝜙
R = 2a cos
2
Therefore the intensity at that point will be
𝝓
I = 4IO cos2
𝟐

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

WAVE OPTICS 83
26. Mention the conditions for constructive interference and destructive interference.
Condition for constructive interference:
For constructive interference the resultant intensity is maximum.
𝜙
i.e cos2 =1 Phase difference 𝝓 = 𝒏(𝟐𝝅) where n = 0,1,2…….
2
Path difference ∆𝒙 = 𝒏𝝀 where n = 0,1,2…….
Condition for destructive interference:
For destructive interference the resultant intensity is minimum.
𝜙
i.e cos2 =0 Phase difference 𝝓 = (𝟐𝒏 + 𝟏)𝝅 where n = 0,1,2,------
2
𝝀
Path difference ∆𝒙 = (𝟐𝒏 + 𝟏) where n = 0,1,2,------
𝟐

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 84
11.DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER
1. What is Electron emission?
The phenomenon of emission of electrons from a metal surface is called electron emission.

2. What is Photoelectric effect?

The phenomenon of emission of electrons from the surface of a metal when radiation of
suitable frequency falls on it is called photoelectric effect. The emitted electrons are called
photoelectrons and the current due to these electrons is called as photoelectric current

3. Who discovered photoelectric effect?

Photoelectric effect is discovered by Henrich Hertz in 1887. While demonstrating the
existence of electromagnetic waves by means of spark discharge; Hertz found that the high voltage
sparks across the detector loop were enhanced when the emitter plate was illuminated by UV light
from an arc lamp. The UV light falling on the metal surface caused the emission of negatively
charged particles which are now known to be electrons into the surrounding space and hence
enhanced the high voltage sparks.

4. Explain Lenard’s observations on photoelectric effect.

Lenard (1862-1947) observed that, when UV radiations were allowed to fall on the emitter
plate (cathode) kept at negative potential of an evacuated glass tube, current flows through the
external circuit. As soon as the UV radiations were stopped, the current flow is also stopped. These
observations indicated that when UV radiation fall on emitter plate, electrons are ejected from it
which are attracted towards the collector plate (Anode) kept at positive potential. This flow of
electrons through the tube results in the current in the external circuit.

5. Explain Hallwach’s observations on photoelectric effect.

Hallwachs connected a negatively charged zinc plate to a negatively charged electroscope
and observed the increase in divergence of leaves. When zinc plate was illuminated by UV light, he
observed the decrease in divergence of leaves i.e the uncharged zinc plate became positively
charged when it was exposed to UV radiation. The positive charge on a negatively charged zinc
plate was further enhanced when it was more illuminated by UV light. From these observations
Hallwachs concluded that negatively charged particles were emitted from zinc plate under the
action of UV light.

Hallwachs and Lenard also observed that when UV light falls on the emitter plate, no
electrons were emitted when frequency of incident radiation was smaller than a certain minimum
value called threshold frequency.

6. Describe the experiment to study of Photoelectric effect .

The experimental arrangement to study photoelectric effect is as shown in the above figure.
It consists of an evacuated glass bulb with a side tube fitted with a quartz window C and A are
the electrodes. C is the emitter coated with photosensitive material and is maintained of negative
potential and anode A is maintained at positive potential by using a battery. Micro ammeter is
connected to measure photoelectric current and voltmeter measures potential difference between
the plates. When no UV rays falls on emitter, photoelectric current is zero. As soon as UV rays
falls on emitter micro ammeter shows current due to the emission of electrons from emitter

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 85
which are attracted towards anode. This confirms the emission of electrons from the emitter
when UV rays falls on it.

7. What is saturation current?

It is the maximum value of the photoelectric
current for fixed frequency and fixed intensity of radiation.
8. Show the Variation of photocurrent with
intensity of incident radiation Photoelectric
current

Intensity

Stopping
potential Metal A Metal B
9. Show the variation of stopping potential
with frequency of incident radiation (V0)

𝜈0 ν01
O Frequency of incident radiation
10. Show the Variation of photocurrent
with collector plate potential for
I3 > I2 > I1
different intensity of incident radiation Photoelectric I3
current
I2
I1

Stopping potential

Retarding potential V0 Accele. Potential

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 86
11. Show the Variation of photoelectric current with collector plate potential for different frequencies of
incident radiation

12. Mention the failures of Wave theory to explain Photoelectric effect .

According to wave nature

 Maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is directly proportional to intensity of radiation.

 Photoelectric effect takes place for all frequencies of radiation.
 There is a time lag between the incidence of photons and ejection of photoelectrons.

But according to particle nature

 KE is independent of intensity.
 Photoelectric effect does not take place below threshold frequency.
 Photoelectric effect is instantaneous.
Hence it is clear that predictions of wave theory are against the photoelectric
experimental observations.

13. Give Millikan explanation for the validity of Einstein’s photoelectric equation

We have Kmax = eVo

From Einstein’s photoelectric equation
V0
eVo= h𝜈 - W A
ℎ 𝑊 ℎ
Vo = ( 𝑒 )𝜈 - Slope=
𝑒 𝑒
B
This is an important result. It A
predicts that the V0 versus 𝜈 curve is a
straight line with slope = (h/e), independent
of the nature of the material.
C
During 1906-1916, Millikan
performed a series of experiments on O ϒ0 𝜈
photoelectric effect, aimed at disproving
Einstein’s photoelectric equation. He 𝑊 /𝑒 D
measured the slope of the straight line
obtained for sodium, as shown in Fig.
Using the known value of e, he determined the value of Planck’s constant h. This value was
close to the value of Planck’s constant (= 6.626 × 10–34J s) determined in an entirely different
context. In this way, Millikan proved the validity of Einstein’s photoelectric equation, instead of
disproving it.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 87
14. What do you mean by Particle nature of light?
According to Einstein, photon is associated with definite value of energy and momentum.
Hence light is considered to have particle nature.

15. Who proposed Wave nature of matter & what is his hypothesis?
Louis de Broglie made a daring suggestion that like radiation, moving materials particles
like electrons, neutrons etc also exhibit dual character i.e., sometimes they behave as particles and
sometimes as waves. This suggestion was based on the reasoning that since nature loves symmetry,
the two physical quantities i.e., energy and matter must be mutually symmetrical. That is if radiant
energy has dual nature then matter in motion must also posses dual nature.

16. Mention the expression for de Broglie wavelength in terms of kinetic energy.
𝜆 = h / √2𝑚𝐾
17. Mention the expression for de Broglie wavelength in terms of accelerating potential.
𝜆 = h / √2𝑚𝑉𝑞

TWO and THREE marks important questions

18. Define the terms work function (W or𝜙0 ) & threshold frequency
The minimum amount of energy required by an electron to just escape from the metal
surface is called work function of the metal.
The minimum frequency of incident radiation below which photoelectron emission does not
take place is called threshold frequency

19. Define the practical unit of work function.

Electron volt (eV) is the practical unit of work function.
It is the energy acquired by an electron when it is accelerated by a potential difference of one
volt. 1eV = 1.6 x 10-19 J
20. Define the different types of electron emission.
1. Thermionic emission: The process of electron emission from a heated metal surface is
called thermionic emission.
2. Field emission: The process of emission of electrons by the application of a strong electric
field at the surface of a metal is called field emission.
3. Photoelectric emission: The process of electron emission from a metal surface when a light
of suitable frequency is incident on it is called photoelectric emission.

21. Give the experimental observations of photoelectric effect OR Laws of photoelectric effect.
1) Photoelectric effect is instantaneous process.
2) For a given metal photoemission takes place above certain minimum frequency of incident
radiations. It is called threshold frequency.
3) Above threshold frequency, photoelectric current is directly proportional to the intensity of
incident radiation.
4) Above threshold frequency, the maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons is directly
proportional to the frequency of incident radiation.
5) Photoelectric current just becomes zero at a particular negative voltage. It is called stopping
potential.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 88
22. Define stopping potential. What is the significance of stopping potential?
It is the minimum negative potential given to the anode at which photoelectric current
becomes zero.
Stopping potential is a measure of maximum kinetic energy of photoelectrons. Hence
stopping potential is directly proportional to the frequency of incident radiation.
23. Outline the Einstein’s explanation of photoelectric effect.

According to Planck light consists of discrete packets of energy called quanta or photon.
The energy associated with each photon is given by E = h𝜈 where 𝜈 is the frequency of radiation
and h is the Planck’s constant.
Einstein gave accurate explanation of photoelectric effect on the basis of quantum theory.
When a photon interacts with an electron, it transfers all its energy to a single electron. The energy
of the incident photon is utilised in two ways. A part of the energy is used to free the electron from
the surface of the metal i.e., work function and the remaining energy is used to provide maximum
KE to the ejected photoelectron.
i.e., Energy of the incident photon = maximum KE of the photoelectrons + work function
h𝜈 = Kmax + W
Kmax = h𝜈 - W
i.e., ½ mV2 = h(𝜈-𝜈 0) since W = h𝜈 0
This equation is known as Einstien’s photoelectric equation. This equation can be used to explain
the laws of photoelectric effect.

24. Explain the experimental results Einstein’s photoelectric equation.

1. Since Kmax is non negative, photoelectron emission is possible only if h > 𝜙0 . The
minimum energy of the incident photon required for photoelectron emission is h0 = 𝜙0
where 𝜈 0 is the threshold frequency.
2. As frequency of incident radiation increases, work function being constant for a given metal
max KE of photoelectrons increases with the frequency of incident radiation.
3. When light intensity is increased, the number of photons colliding with the free electrons
inside the metal increases. Therefore more electrons are emitted for frequencies greater than
threshold frequency.
4. According to Einstein , the collision between a photon and an electron is similar to the
collision between the two micro particles. Hence photoelectric effect is instantaneous.
25. Mention the characteristics of photons.
1. Rest mass of a photon is zero
2. Each photon has energy E = h𝜈 = hc/𝜆.
3. Each photon has momentum p = h𝜈/c = h/ 𝜆.
4. Photons are electrically neutral and are not deflected by electric or magnetic fields.
5. All photons travel with the speed of light in space.
26. What are matter waves? Obtain an expression for de Broglie wavelength.
The wave associated with a moving particle is called matter wave or de Broglie wave.

The energy associated with a photon of frequency 𝜈 is given by

E = h𝜈 where h is Planck’s constant.
If photon is considered as a particle of mass m then its energy is given by
2
E = mc where c is the speed of light
h𝜈 = mc2
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
 DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION & MATTER 89
2
hc/𝜆 = mc where 𝜆 is the wavelength of photon
𝜆 = h / mc = h/p where p = mc the momentum of photon
The above equation has been derived for a photon of radiation. de Broglie suggested that the
above equation is applicable to both photons and material particles. Thus if m is the mass of a
particle moving with a velocity V then the wavelength associated with it is given by
𝝀 = h / mv
The above equation is known as de Broglie wave equation. It explains the dual nature of matter as it
connects the wave characteristic 𝜆 with the particle characteristic P.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ATOMS 90
12.ATOMS
1. What is an atom?
Atom is the smallest particle of any matter which is invisible and further
indivisible. It was discovered by John Dalton.

2. Explain Thomson’s model of atom

The first attempt to explain the structure of an atom was made by Thomson.
According to him
1. An atom consists of a sphere of diameter about 10-15 m in which the entire
mass and positive charges are uniformly distributed.
2. Electrons are embedded in the positive charged sphere just like seeds in a
water melon or plums in pudding.
3. Total positive charge of the atom is equal to the total negative charge.
3. Explain Rutherford’s α particle scattering experiment or Geiger-Marsden
experiment:
Hans Geiger and Ernst
Marsden performed the alpha
scattering experiment at the
suggestion of Rutherford. The
experimental arrangement is as
shown in the figure. Alpha
particles of energy 5.5 MeV
emitted by this source (83Bi214)
are collimated into a narrow
beam with the help of a lead slit.
The collimated beam of alpha
particles allowed to fall on a thin
No of 𝛼 particles
gold foil of thickness 2.1 x 10-7 m.
scattered
The alpha particles scattered in
different directions are observed
through a rotatable detector
consisting of a zinc sulphide screen
and a microscope.
The alpha particle produce
bright flashes or scintillations on 900
the ZnS screen. These are observed  
O Scattering angle  1800
in the microscope and counted at
different angles from the direction of the incident beam. The angle of deviation of the
alpha particle from its initial direction is called scattering angle.
The graph obtained by plotting the number of 𝛼 particles scattered at different
angles in a given time is as shown in figure

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ATOMS 91
4. Explain the alpha particle trajectory.
According to Rutherford, the scattering of 𝜶 particle is due to repulsive force of
the positive nucleus on the positively charged 𝜶 particle as shown in the figure.

The trajectory traced by an α-

particle depends on the impact
parameter, b of collision.
The impact parameter is
the perpendicular distance of the
initial velocity vector of the α-
particle from the centre of the
nucleus.
A given beam of α-particles
has a distribution of impact
parameters b, so that
the beam is scattered in various
directions with different probabilities (In
a beam, all particles have nearly same kinetic energy.)
It is seen that an α-particle close to the nucleus (small impact parameter)
suffers large scattering.
In case of head-on collision, the impact parameter is minimum and the α-
particle rebounds back (θ ≅ π). For a large impact parameter, the α-particle goes
nearly undeviated and has a small deflection (θ ≅ 0).
The fact that only a small fraction of the number of incident particles rebound
back indicates that the number of α-particles undergoing head on collision is small.
This, in turn, implies that the mass of the atom is concentrated in a small volume.
Rutherford scattering therefore, is a powerful way to determine an upper limit
to the size of the nucleus

5. What are the draw backs of Rutherford’s atomic model?

1. It could not explain the stability of the atom.
2. It could not explain the origin of spectral lines.

6. Mention an expression for Radii of stationary orbits.

𝑛2 ℎ2 𝜖0 𝝐𝟎 𝒏𝟐 𝒉𝟐
𝑟= For hydrogen atom Z = 1 𝒓=
𝜋𝑚𝑧𝑒 2 𝝅𝒎𝒆𝟐

7. What is the value of Bohr radius?

Radius of first orbit (n=1) of hydrogen atom is called Bohr radius denoted
𝝐𝟎 𝒉 𝟐
by r0 =
𝝅𝒎𝒆𝟐
Substituting the values of 𝜖0 h, m and e we get r0 = 5.29 x 10 -11m

8. How the radius of electron orbit depends on nth orbit?

r 𝜶 n2 (radius is directly proportional to the square of nth orbit)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ATOMS 92
9. Mention the expression for velocity of electron in Bohr’s stationary orbit.
𝑍𝑒 2
v=
2𝜖0 𝑛ℎ
For a given atom Z being constant v 𝛼 1/n. this shows that electrons in outer
orbits have lower speeds that those in inner orbits
10. What is the speed of electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom?
𝑒2 𝑍 𝐶 𝑍
V= x = x
2𝜖0 ℎ 𝑛 137 𝑛
𝐶
For first orbit, V1 =
137
Speed of electron in the first orbit of hydrogen atom is 1/137 times the speed
of light.
11. Mention an expression for the total energy of electron in a stationary orbit by
assuming the expression for radius.
𝑚𝑍 2 𝑒 4
E= −
8𝜖0 2 𝑛2 ℎ2

For hydrogen atom,Z=1

−𝒎𝒆𝟒
E=
𝟖𝝐𝟎 𝟐 𝒏𝟐𝒉𝟐
Note:
1. Negative sign shows that energy must be supplied to remove an electron
from its orbit i.e., electron is in a bound state
2. E  i/n2 As the value of n increases, En also increases on account of –ve
sign
3. Energy of electron in the nth orbit is
−𝑚𝑒 4 𝑍2
En = ×
8𝜖0 2ℎ 2 𝑛2
𝑍2
= -13.6 x eV
𝑛2
In hydrogen atom, E1 = -13.6 eV, E2 = 3.4 eV etc
1 𝑍𝑒 2
4. We have KE =
2 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟
𝑍𝑒 2
PE = − 4𝜋𝜖
0𝑟

 PE = -27.2 eV, KE = 13.6 eV

5. As we go to higher orbits KE decreases but PE increases, so that total
energy increases
12. What is the experimental value of Rydberg constant?
R = 1.097 x 107 m-1

13. What is line emission spectrum?

When an atomic gas or vapour of 𝛼 particle at low pressure is exited by passing
an electric current through it, the gas or vapor emits radiation of certain specific
wavelengths. A spectrum of this kind is called line emission spectrum, and it consists
of a few bright lines on a dark background.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ATOMS 93
14. What is line abortion spectrum?
When white light passes through a gas and we analyse the transmitted light
using a spectrometer we find some dark lines in the spectrum. These dark lines
correspond precisely to those wavelengths which were found in the emission line
spectrum of the gas. This is called the absorption spectrum of the material of the
gas.
15. Which line spectra acts as a finger prints for identification of the gas?
Line emission spectrum serve as a type of “fingerprint” for identification of the
gas.
16. Draw the Emission lines in the spectrum of hydrogen.

17. What is ionization?

The process of removing an electron from its orbit to an infinite distance from
the nucleus is called ionization.
18. What is ionization energy?
The minimum energy required to free the electron from the ground state of an
atom is called ionization energy. For hydrogen atom it is 13.6 eV.

19. What is ionization potential?

The minimum potential difference to which an outside electron should be
accelerated so that it acquires KE just sufficient to ionize the atom by collision is
called ionization potential. Ionization potential of hydrogen atom is 13.6 volt.

20. What is excitation?

The process of transferring an electron from lower energy state to a higher energy
state is called excitation.

21. What is excitation energy?

The energy required to transfer an electron from lower energy state to higher
energy state is called excitation energy. First excitation energy of hydrogen atom is
10.2 eV.

22. What is excitation potential?

The minimum potential difference to which an outside electron should be
accelerated so that it acquires KE just sufficient to excite an atom by collision is
called excitation potential. First excitation potential for hydrogen atom is 10.2V.
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
ATOMS 94
TWO and THREE marks important questions
23. What are the conclusions of Rutherford’s α particle experiment?
1. Most of the 𝜶 particles passed through the gold foil undeflected which lead
Rutherford to conclude that atom has lot of empty space in it.
2. The back scattering of 𝛼 particles lead Rutherford to conclude that most of
the positive charge and nearly the entire mass of the atom were
concentrated in a small central core called nucleus
24. State the postulates of Bohr’s theory.
 First postulate: An electron in an atom could revolve round the nucleus in
certain stable orbit without the emission of radiant energy.
 Second postulate (quantization rule): The electron revolves round the
nucleus only in those orbits for which the angular momentum is an integral
multiple of h/2𝜋.
Where h is the Plank’s constant, the angular momentum of the orbiting
𝑛ℎ
electron is quantized. That is L= where n = 1, 2, 3….
2𝜋
 Third postulate: An electron can make a transition from a stationary orbit
of higher energy to a stationary orbit of lower energy. In this process a
photon is emitted having energy equal to the energy difference between the
initial and final states E = E2 - E1 = h𝜈
25. Obtain an expression for the total energy of electron in a stationary orbit by
assuming the expression for radius.
The electrostatic force of attraction between the nucleus and electron
provides the necessary centripetal force
1 𝑍𝑒 2 𝑚𝑣 2 𝑍𝑒 2
=  𝑚𝑣 2 =
4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟 2 𝑟 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟
1 1 𝑍𝑒 2
KE = 𝑚𝑣 2 =
2 2 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟
The PE between two point charges q1 and q2 separated by a distance r is given
by
1 𝑞1 𝑞2 𝑍𝑒 2
PE = == −
4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟 4𝜋∈0 𝑟

 TE possessed by an electron due to the nucleus is given by:

E = KE + PE
1 𝑍𝑒 2 𝑍𝑒 2 𝑍𝑒 2
= – =−
2 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟 8𝜋𝜖0 𝑟
𝜖0 𝑛 2 ℎ 2
Substituting for ‘r’ we get (r = )
𝜋𝑚𝑒 2 𝑧

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

ATOMS 95
𝑍𝑒 2
E= − 𝜖0 𝑛2 ℎ2
8𝜋𝜖0
𝜋𝑚𝑒2 𝑧

𝑚𝑍 2 𝑒 4
E= −
8𝜖0 2 𝑛2 ℎ2

For hydrogen atom,Z=1

−𝒎𝒆𝟒
E=
𝟖𝝐𝟎 𝟐 𝒏𝟐𝒉𝟐

26. Give de Broglie’s explanation for Bohr’s second postulate of quantization:

Louis de Broglie argued that the electron
in its circular orbit, as proposed by Bohr, must be
seen as a particle wave. In analogy to waves travelling
on a string.
For an electron moving in nth circular orbit of
radius rn, the total distance is the circumference of
the orbit, 2πrn.
Thus 2π rn = nλ, n = 1, 2, 3... (12.24) Figure
illustrates a standing particle wave on a circular orbit
for n = 4, i.e., 2πrn = 4λ, where λ is the de Broglie
wavelength of the electron moving in nth orbit.

We have
ℎ ℎ
= =
𝑝 𝑚𝑉𝑛

ℎ
 2𝜋rn = n(𝑚𝑉 )
𝑛

𝑛ℎ
mVnrn = 2𝜋

This is the quantum condition proposed by Bohr for the angular momentum
of the electro. Thus de Broglie hypothesis provided an explanation for Bohr’s second
postulate for the quantization of angular momentum of the orbiting electron.

27. Mention the Limitations of Bohr atomic model.

1. It is applicable only to one electron atom.
2. Fine structure of spectral lines cannot be explained.
3. It cannot give any information about the intensity of each spectral line.
4. Bohr’s model considered only circular orbits while elliptical orbits are also
possible.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUCLEI 96
13.NUCLEAR PHYSICS

1. Give the Composition of Nucleus.

 Nuclei are mainly composed of protons and neutrons.
 The total number of protons and neutrons in a nucleus is equal to the mass number (A) of
that atom.
 The number of protons in the nucleus is equal to the atomic number ‘Z’ and (A-Z) is equal
to the number of neutrons (N).
 Symbolically ZXA represents nucleus of an atom of an element. ‘X’ stands for chemical
symbol of element A = Z + N.
2. What is a Proton and mention its value?
It is positively charged particle of charge 1.6 x 10 -19c and has a mass 1.6726 x 10-27 kg.

3. What is a Neutron and mention its value?

It is a charge less particle and has mass equal to 1.6750 x 10-27 kg.

4. What are the dimensions of Nucleus?

 SIZE OF NUCLEUS: Nucleus may be considered as a sphere whose radius is determined
quite accurately by the formula
R 𝛼 A1/3 => R = R0 A1/3 (∵V 𝛼A)
R0 = proportionality constant = 1.2 x 10-15 m = 1.2 fm
∴ R = 1.2 x 1015 x A1/3 m
 VOLUME: V = 4/3 𝜋R3  V = 4/3 𝝅R03A
𝑀𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝐴 ×1.66 × 10−27
 DENSITY: D = 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑖𝑚𝑒 = 4
( )𝜋(1.2 ×10−15 )3 𝐴
3

D = 2.3 x 1017 kg/m3 (density of nucleus is independent of mass number)

 MASS: Mass of nucleons (both protons & neutrons) are measured by a small unit called
atomic mass unit or unified mass.
5. Define 1 Atomic mass unit (amu or U).
1
It is defined as ( 12 )th of the mass of a 6C12 atom. and is equal to 1.66 x 10-27kg.

6. Show that 1 amu = 1.66 x 10-27kg.

According to Avogadro’s hypothesis the number of atoms in 12g of 6C
12
is equal to Avogadro
number. i.e 6.023 x 1023.
12
The mass of one carbon atom (6C12) = 6.023 × 1023 = 1.99 × 10−26 𝑘𝑔
1 amu = (1/12) x 1.99 x 10-26 kg
1 amu = 1.66 x 10-27 kg

7. What is the energy equivalent to 1amu?

Using Einstein’s mass energy relation E = mc2, mass can be be expressed in terms of energy.
1 amu = (1.66 x 10-27 kg) x (2.998 x 108 m/s)2
1 1
= 1.4925 x 10-10 J = 1.4925 x 10-10 x 1.602 x 10 −13 𝑀𝑒𝑉 (Since 1J = 𝑀𝑒𝑉)
1.602 x 10 −13
1 amu = 931.5 MeV
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
NUCLEI 97
8. What is the value of 1MeV?
1MeV = 1.602 x 10 −13 J
9. Mention the formula to calculate B.E
Binding energy BE = m x c2 Joules. (When mass is in kg)
Binding energy BE = m x 931.5 MeV (When mass is in amu)

10. Explain the features of binding energy curve.

𝐵.𝐸
The graph is obtained by plotting the binding energy per nucleon ( ), as a function of
𝐴
mass number ‘A’ for various nuclei, such curve is shown in figure.
The binding energy curve has the following features.

i. The binding energy per nucleon of both light and heavy nuclei is very low.
ii. The binding energy per nucleon increases rapidly upto A =20 and the curve contains peaks
corresponding to Helium, Beryllium, Carbon and Oxygen. The peaks indicates that these
elements are more stable than their neighbours like Lithium, Boron and Nitrogen.
iii. After A = 30 to 170, the curve is almost flat. The specific binding energy of these elements
is very high. Hence they are more stable. Among them iron is most stable element for which
specific binding energy is 8.75Mev.
iv. After A = 170, the specific binding energy gradually decreases. Heavy elements such a U-
235 have still lower specific binding energy. Hence they are highly unstable and radioactive.

11. What is Radioactivity and who discovered it?

It is the spontaneous nuclear disintegration of certain heavy elements with emission of
certain radiations. It was discovered by Henri Becquerel in 1896.

12. Mention three types of radioactive decay.

 𝜶-decay in which a helium nucleus 42He is emitted.
 𝜷-decay in which electrons or positrons (particles with the same mass as electrons, but with
a charge exactly opposite to that of electron) are emitted.
 𝜸-decay in which high energy (hundreds of keV or more) photons are emitted.

13. What is nuclear fission?

It is the process of splitting of a heavy nucleus into two light nuclei of comparable masses.
During this process, enormous amount of energy is released.
Otto Hahn and Strassmann recognised nuclear fission for the first time.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUCLEI 98
14. Explain nuclear fission with an example.
When U235 is bombarded with slow neutron, first it absorbs neutron and becomes compound
nucleus of U236. In short interval it splits up into fragments of Ba141 and Kr92 and releasing 3
neutrons with 200 MeV of energy. The reaction as follows.

92U
235
+ 0n1 → [92U236] → 56Ba
141
+ 36Kr92 + 30n1 + 200 MeV energy

In this reaction mass defect is about 0.216u and is equivalent to energy of 200 MeV

15. What are slow neutrons or thermal neutrons?

These are the neutrons having kinetic energy less than 1 MeV.

16. What are fast neutrons?

These are the neutrons having kinetic energy more than 1 MeV.
17. What is nuclear fusion? Explain with an example.
The process of combining two light nuclei into a single nucleus is called nuclear fusion. During
this process; a large amount of energy is released.

Eg:

In the first reaction, two protons combine to form a deuteron and a positron with a
release of 0.42 MeV energy.
In second reaction two deuterons combine to form the light isotope of helium with a
release of 3.27 MeV energy.
In third reaction two deuterons combine to form a triton and a proton with a release
of 4.03 MeV energy.
Note:

1. In fission of U235, 0.1% mass of uranium is converted into energy i.e 0.85 Mev energy is
released per nucleon.
2. In the fusion of four protons, 0.7% of mass of Hydrogen is converted into energy i.e 6 Mev
energy is released per nucleon.
3. So fusion energy per nucleon is about 7 times the fission energy per nucleon.
4. To carryout fusion of two nuclei, they must be brought very close (1 fermi) to each other so
that they overcome the repulsive force. This is only possible at very high temperatures
nearly equal to 107 K that is why nuclear fusion reaction are called thermo nuclear reactions.
5. Nuclear fusion takes place in sun and stars. It is used in the preparation of Hydrogen bomb.

18. What is thermonuclear fusion?

When fusion is achieved by raising the temperature of the system so that particles have
enough kinetic energy to overcome the coulomb repulsive behaviour, it is called thermonuclear
fusion.
Thermonuclear fusion is the source of energy output in the interior of stars.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUCLEI 99
19. Explain the process of nuclear fusion inside the sun.
The interior of the sun has a temperature of 1.5×107 K, which is considerably less than the
estimated temperature required for fusion of particles of average energy. Clearly, fusion in the sun
involves protons whose energies are much above the average energy.
The fusion reaction in the sun is a multi-step process in which the hydrogen is burned into
helium. Thus, the fuel in the sun is the hydrogen in its core. The proton-proton (p, p) cycle by
which this occurs is represented by the following sets of reactions:

1H
1
+ 1H
1
 1H
2
+ 1e
0
+v ...... (a)
1H
1
+ 1H
2
 2He
3
+ 𝛾 ...... (b)
The above fusion reactions (a) and (b) must occur twice to yield two 2He3 nuclei. Therefore next
reaction can be written as
2He
3
+ 2He
3
 2He
4
+ 21H1 + energy
The net result of the above reactions is that 4 protons are fused to produce as 𝛼 particle and a few
other particles and release of a total energy 25.71 Mev
41H1  2He
4
+ 21e0 + 2𝛾 + 2𝜈
Thus, four hydrogen atoms combine to form an 2He4 atom with a release of 26.7 MeV of energy.

20. What is red giant?

The age of the sun is about 5×109 year and it is estimated that there is enough hydrogen in the
sun to keep it going for another 5 billion years. After that, the hydrogen burning will stop and the
sun will begin to cool and will start to collapse under gravity, which will raise the core temperature.
The outer envelope of the sun will expand, turning it into the so called red giant.

TWO and THREE marks important questions

21. What are isotopes, isobars and isotones? Give one example for each.
 The nuclei having the same atomic number (Z) but different mass numbers (A) are
1 2 3
called Isotopes. Example: 1𝐻 , 1𝐻 , 1𝐻

The nuclei having same mass numbers (A) but different atomic numbers (Z) are called
3 3
Isobars. Example: 1𝐻 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2𝐻

The nuclei having same number of neutrons (A-Z) but different atomic numbers (Z) in
2 3
their nuclei are called Isotones. Example: 1𝐻 𝑎𝑛𝑑 2𝐻𝑒

22. Define Mass Defect and Binding energy (B.E).

Mass defect: The difference between the rest mass of an nuclei and the sum of the masses
of the constituent particles is known as mass defect. It is denoted by m.
Binding energy: The minimum energy required to split the nucleus into its constituent
nucleons is known as B.E.
23. Mention the formula to calculate mass defect.
m = [Zmp + (A-Z)mn] – MN
Where mp and mn are the masses of proton and neutrons respectively and MN is the mass of
nucleus of the atom zXA

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUCLEI 100
24. Define Binding fraction (or) specific binding energy. Mention its significance.
The ratio of Binding energy to its mass number is called Binding fraction.
𝐵𝑖𝑛𝑑𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝐸𝑛𝑒𝑟𝑔𝑦 𝐵𝐸
Binding fraction = =
𝑀𝑎𝑠𝑠 𝑛𝑢𝑚𝑏𝑒𝑟 𝐴
Significance: It gives the stability of the nucleus.

25. What is nuclear force? Mention the properties of Nuclear force.

The strong attractive force between the nucleons inside the nucleus is called the nuclear force.
Properties
1) Nuclear forces are the strongest in nature
2) Nuclear forces are charge independent
3) Nuclear forces are short range forces
4) Nuclear forces are spin dependent.
5) Nuclear forces are non-central
6) Nuclear forces are saturated forces

26. Mention the differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
Nuclear fission Nuclear fusion
1. It is the process of splitting of a heavy 1. It is the process of combining two light
nucleus into two light nuclei of nuclei into a single nucleus
comparable masses
2. Energy released per fission is more 2. Energy released per fusion is less
3. Energy released per nucleon is less 3. Energy released per nucleon is more
4. It can be controlled 4. It cannot be controlled
5. It takes place at all temperatures 5. It takes place only at high temperatures
6. It forms the principle of atom bomb 6. It forms the principle of hydrogen bomb

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 101
14. SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS

1. Give the Classification of solids on the basis of electrical conductivity.

1. Metals:
These are solids which have low resistivity (10-2 to 10-8 Ωm).
And conductivity is high (102 to 108 Sm-1)
Eg: Silver, copper, aluminium etc.
2. Semiconductor:
These are solids which have resistivity (10-5 to 106 Ωm ).
And conductivity (105 to 10-6 Sm-1).
Eg: Germanium, Silicon
3. Insulators: These are the solids which have resistivity 1011 to 1019 Ωm.
And conductivity (10-11 to 10-19 Sm-1).
Eg: Rubber, plastic, glass etc.
2. What is energy band?
It is the group of energy levels with continuous energy variation.
3. What is valance band?
It is the energy band occupied by the valance electrons.
4. What is conduction band?
It is the energy band occupied by the free electrons.
5. What is energy gap?
It is the difference in the maximum energy of valence band and minimum energy of
conduction band.

6. What is intrinsic semiconductor? And explain the conductivity in intrinsic

semiconductor.
A pure semiconductor is called intrinsic semiconductor.
Si and Ge are widely used in semiconductor technology. This is because both of
them are available in their pure form and can be crystallised easily. Both Si and Ge are
tetravalent.
Each of the valance electrons forms a covalent bond with one valance electron of
neighbouring Ge atom as shown in figure. At zero Kelvin Ge crystal has completely filled
valance band and are empty conduction band and hence it behaves like an insulator.

As temperature increases some electrons gain energy and come out of atom by
breaking covalent bond. When an electron jumps from the valance band to the condition
band a vacancy called hole is created. It has an effective charge +e.
When an electric field is applied, electrons move towards positive potential while the
holes move towards negative potential.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 102
If Ie is the current due to the electrons and IG is the current due to the holes then
the net current I = Ie + IG.
In intrinsic semiconductor the number of free electrons ne and the number of holes
nh are always equal.
ne = nh = ni where ni is called intrinsic carrier concentration.
Along with the process of generation of conduction electrons and holes, a
simultaneous process of recombination of electrons and holes occur. At equilibrium, the
rate of generation is equal to the rate of recombination.
An intrinsic semiconductor will behave like insulator at 0 k with filled valance band
and empty conduction band (Fig a).
At T>0 k, some electrons are excited to the conduction band leaving behind equal
number of holes in the valance band (Fig b). As temperature increases,

more and more electrons move to the conduction band. As a result conductivity increases
with rise in temperature

7. What is a hole?
When an electron jumps from the valance band to the condition band a vacancy is
created called hole. It has an effective charge +e.

8. What is doping?
The process of adding impurities is called doping.

9. What are dopants?

The impurity atoms added for pure semiconductor are called dopants.

10. What are donors?

These are the pentavalent impurity atoms which donate the electron into the pure
semiconductor during doping. Example: Arsenic, Antimony etc.

11. What are acceptors?

These are the trivalent impurity atoms which accept the electron into the pure
semiconductor during doping. Example: Indium, Boron etc.

12. What is the necessary condition for doping?

The size of the dopant and the semiconductor atoms should be nearly the same.

13. What is extrinsic semiconductor?

These are impure form of semiconductors.

14. What are the types of extrinsic semiconductors?

 n-type semiconductor
 p-type semiconductor

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 103
15. Explain the formation of n type semiconductor.
Silicon or Germanium doped with pentavalent impurities like phosphorous, antimony,
arsenic etc is called n-type semiconductor.
Ge atoms have four valance electrons, each of which is covalently bonded with one of
the four adjacent Ge atoms. If an atom with five valance electrons is added to the crystal
lattice in the place of Ge atom, then that atom will have four covalent bonds and one
unbounded electron as shown in the figure.
This electron will have very less ionisation energy. So that it can be made easily free.
The energy required for the fifth electron to exit from the atom is 0.01eV in Ge and 0.05eV
in silicon which is much less than the forbidden band for pure semiconductors i.e, about
0.72 eV in Ge and 1.1 eV in Si. The small amount of ionisation energy is easily provided by
thermal agitation of the crystal.

An additional energy state called donor impurity level exists due to donor impurity.
The donor impurity level ED is slightly below the bottom Ec of the conduction band with
very small supply of energy of about 0.01eV.

The number of free electrons in the semiconductor depends on temperature. Since

the excitation of these electrons does not result in the formation of holes and level of
doping.

Total number of conducting electrons ne is always more than holes in the lattice.
Thus is n-type semiconductor, electrons are the majority charge carriers and holes are the
minority charge carriers i.e, ne >> nh .

16. Explain the formation of p type semiconductor.

Silicon or Germanium doped with trivalent impurities like aluminium, boron, indium
etc is called p-type semiconductor.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 104
The impurity atoms provide electrons that exists in the fourth band constitutes a hole.
The hole associated with the atom can accept an electron to complete the forth bond.
When sufficiently large number of such impurity atoms are added, the number of holes
increases as compared to the exited electrons. Thus in n-type semiconductors, the holes
are the majority charge carriers while electrons are the minority charge carriers. That is
nh>>ne

An additional energy state called acceptor impurity level exists due to acceptor
impurity. The acceptor energy level EA is slightly above the top EV of the valance bond with
a small supply of energy (0.01eV to 0.05eV), electrons from valance band jump to the level
EA and ionise the acceptor atoms negatively leaving holes in the valance band.

The electron and hole concentration in a semiconductor in thermal equilibrium is given by

nenh =𝑛𝑖2 where ni is The intrinsic concentration.

17. Explain the formation of p-n junction.

When an acceptor impurity is added to one side and a donor impurity is added to other
side of an intrinsic semiconductor, first side becomes p-type and second side becomes n-
type. The surface region is called the p-n junction.

When p-n junction is formed, both diffusion and drift are observed. In n region
concentration of electrons are more where as in p-region concentration of holes is more.
Due to the concentration gradient holes diffuse from p-side to n-side (pn) and electrons
diffuse from n-side to p-side (np). This motion of charge carriers gives rise to diffusion
current across the junction.

When an electron diffuses from np, it leaves behind an ionised donor (+ve charge) on
n-side. This ionised donor is immobile as it is bounded to the surrounding atoms. As the
electrons continue to diffuse from np, layer of positive space-charge region on
n-side of the junction is developed.

Similarly, when a hole diffuses from p → n due to the concentration

gradient, it leaves behind an ionised acceptor (negative charge) which is immobile. As the
holes continue to diffuse, a layer of negative space-charge region on the p-side of the
junction is developed.

This space charge region on either side of the junction together is called depletion
region. The thickness of this region is of the order of one tenth of a micrometer.

Due to the positive space charge region on n side and negative space charge region
on p side there is a electric field directed from positive charge towards negative charge.
Due to this field, an electron on p-side of the junction moves to n side and a hole on n side
moves to p side. The current due to this is called drift current. The direction of this
current is opposite to the direction of diffusion current.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 105
The diffusion current is large initially than drift current. As the diffusion continues,
the space charges regions and electric field strength increases until the diffusion current
equals the drift current. Thus a p-n junction is formed and under equilibrium there is no
net current.
The loss of electrons from the n region and the gain of electrons by the p region
cause a potential difference across the junction of the two regions.

The polarity of this potential is such as to oppose further flow of carriers so that a
condition of equilibrium exists. Since this potential tends to prevent the movement of
electrons from the n region into the p region, it is also called a barrier potential.

18. What is a semiconductor diode?

It is basically a p-n junction with metallic contacts provided at the ends for the
application of an external voltage. It is a two terminal device. The direction of arrow
indicated the direction of conventional current.

19. Explain p-n junction diode under forward bias:

“When positive terminal of battery is connected to p side and negative terminal to n

side then p-n junction is said to be forward biased”.

The direction of the applied voltage V is opposite to the barrier potential Vo.
As a result the width of depletion layer decreases and the barrier height is reduced. The
effective barrier height under forward bias is (V-V0).
When the applied potential is greater than barrier potential then the resistance
offered by diode is small and current will flow through the diode.
Due to the applied voltage, electrons from n side crosses the depletion region and
reach p side, similarly holes from p side cross the junction and reach n side.
This motion of charged carriers on either side gives rise to current. The total diode
forward current is the sum of hole diffusion current and conventional current due to the
electron diffusion and its magnitude is of the order of mA.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 106
20. Explain p-n junction diode under reverse bias:
When the positive terminal of battery is connected to n-side and negative terminal to p-
side then p-n junction is said to be under reverse bias.

The direction of applied voltage is same as the direction of barrier potential. As a

result, the barrier height increases and the width of depletion region increases.

The effective barrier height under reverse bias is (V0+V). This suppresses the flow of
electrons from np and holes from pn. thus diffusion current is much less compared to
forward bias.

There is a small current observed even in reverse bias due to the minority charge
carries. This current is the order of μA. The resistance offered by the junction is very high.

The current under reverse bias is essentially voltage independent up to a critical

reverse bias voltage known a Breakdown voltage (Vbr). When V=Vbr, the reverse current
through the diode increases sharply. Even a slight increase in bias voltage causes large
increase in current as a result of which p-n junction will get destroyed due to overheating.

21. Draw the I-V characteristics of a semiconductor diode:

22. Explain the working of Capacitor filter:

 When the voltage across the capacitor is rising, it gets charged.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 107
 If there is no external load, it remains charged to the peak voltage of the rectified
output.
 When there is a load, it gets discharged through the load and the voltage across it
begins to fall.
 In the next half-cycle of rectified output it again gets charged to the peak value.
 The rate of fall of the voltage across the capacitor depends upon the inverse product
of capacitor C and the effective resistance RL used in the circuit and is called the
time constant.
 To make the time constant large value of C should be large. So capacitor input
filters use large capacitors.
 The output voltage obtained by using capacitor input filter is nearer to the peak
voltage of the rectified voltage.

TWO and THREE marks important questions

23. Distinguish between conductors, semi conductors and insulators on the basis of band
theory of solids:
i. Conductors:
 The conduction band and valance
band are overlapped on each
other i.e the energy gap is zero (Eg
= 0).
 Electrons are free to move within
the substance from valance band
to conduction band. Hence
conduction is possible.
ii. Insulators:
 In insulators the band gap is more
than 3eV.
 No electrons are found in the
conduction band so the electrical
conduction is not possible.
iii. Semiconductors:
 In semiconductors energy gap is
less than 3eV.
 At 0 K no electrons are present in the
conduction band and conduction is not
possible.
 But at room temperature some
electrons from valance band can
acquire enough energy to cross the
energy gap and pass to the conduction
band. These electrons take part in
conduction.

24. Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors:

INTRINSIC EXTRINSIC
1. Pure semiconducting tetravalent 1. Semiconducting tetravalent crystals
crystals doped with impurity
2. Number of electrons = Number of 2. Number of electrons ≠ Number of
holes holes
3. Conductivity is due to equal number 3. Conductivity id due to unequal
of electrons and holes number of electrons and hols

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 108
4. Their electrical conductivity is low 4. Electrical conductivity is high
5. Electrical conductivity depends on 5. Electric conductivity depends on
temperature temperature as well as on dopant
conductivity
6. There is no permitted energy level 6. There will be a donor/acceptor energy
between valance band and level between valance band and
conduction band conduction band

25. Distinguish between n-type and p-type semiconductors:

n-type p-type
1. Obtained by adding pentavalent 1. Obtained by adding trivalent
impurities to pure semiconductors. impurities to pure semiconductors.
2. Electrons are majority carriers 2. Holes are majority carriers
3. Holes are minority carriers 3. Electrons are minority carriers
4. Majority carriers moves in 4. Majority carriers move in valance
conduction band band
5. Minority carriers moves in valance 5. Minority carriers move in conduction
band band.
6. The donor impurity level lies just 6. The acceptor impurity level lies just
below the conduction band above the valance band.
7. The free electrons density is much 7. The hole density is much greater
greater than hole density i.e ne>>nh than free electron density i.e nh>>ne
8. Impurity atoms added provide free 8. Impurity atoms added create
electrons and are called donors vacancies of electrons and are called
acceptors
26. What is rectification?
The process of converting AC into pulsating DC is called rectification. The device which
brings about the rectification is called a rectifier.

27. What is half wave rectifier?

A rectifier which rectifies only one half cycle of input AC is called half wave rectifier.

28. With a circuit diagram, explain the

working of half wave rectifier. Draw
input and output wave forms.
 During positive half cycle of
input AC, A is positive and B
is negative. Therefore diode D
is in forward biased and hence
it conducts.
 During negative half cycle of
input AC, A is negative and B
is positive. Therefore diode D
is in reverse biased and hence
it does not conduct.
 Thus diode conducts only
during one half cycle of input
AC.
 Current flows through the load
resistance in one direction.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

SEMICONDUCTORS 109
29. What is full wave rectifier?
A rectifier which rectifies both the half cycles of input as is called a full wave rectifier.

30. With a circuit diagram, explain the working of

full wave rectifier. Draw input and output wave
forms.
 During positive half cycle A is positive and
B is negative. Therefore diode D1 is in
forward biased and conducts and diode D2
is in reverse biased and does not conduct.
 During negative half cycle A is negative and
B is positive. Therefore diode D1 is in
reverse biased, does not conduct and diode
D2 is in forward biased, conducts.
 Current flows from X and Y through the
load resistance. Current through the load
resistance is in same direction during both
the cycles. This ac is rectified in both half
cycles.

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 110
MCQ’s
7. Electric field of an isolated metallic sphere at
ELECTRIC CHARGES AND FIELDS any interior point is
1. A comb run through one’s dry hair attracts a) Zero
small bits of paper. This is due to b) One
a) Comb is good conductor c) Proportional to field
b) Paper is good conductor d) None of these
c) The atoms in the paper get polarised by the
8. A metallic shell has a point charge q kept
charged comb
d) The comb possesses magnetic properties inside its cavity. Which one of the following
2. Two charges +q and –𝑞 are kept apart. Then diagrams correctly represents the electric
at any point on the right bisector of line lines or forces?
joining the two charges a) b)
a) The electric field strength is zero
b) The electric potential is zero
c) Both electric potential and electric field
strength are zero
d) Both electric potential and electric field
strength are non- zero c) d)
3. Identify the wrong statement in the following.
Coulomb’s law correctly described the electric
force that
a) binds the electrons of an atom to its
nucleus
b) binds the protons and neutrons in the
9. Consider a thin spherical shell of radius 𝑅
nucleus of an atom
c) binds atoms together to form molecules consisting of uniform surface charge density𝜎.
d) Binds atoms and molecules to from solids The electric field at a point of distance 𝑥 from
4. In nature, the electric charge of any system is its centre and outside the shell is
always equal to a) inversely proportional to 𝜎
a) Half integral multiple of the least amount of b) directly proportional to𝑥 2
charge c) directly proportional to 𝜎
b) Zero d) inversely proportional to𝑥 2
c) Square of the least amount of charge 10. The figure shows electric field 𝐸 at a distance
d) Integral multiple of the least amount charge 𝑟 in any direction from the origin𝑂. The
5. If a conducting medium is placed between two electric field 𝐸 is due to
charges, then the electric force between them
will become.
a) Zero b) Infinity
c) 1 N d) 1 dyne
6. Which of the following statement is correct?
a) Electric field is zero on the surface of
current carrying wire. a) A charged hollow metallic sphere of
b) Electric field is non-zero on the axis of radius 𝑂𝑃 with centre at 𝑂
hollow current carrying wire b) A charged solid metallic sphere of
Surface integral of magnetic field for any radius 𝑂𝑃 with centre at𝑂
closed surface is equal to 𝜇0 times of total c) A uniformly charged non-conducting
c)
algebraic sum of current which are crossing sphere of radius 𝑂𝑃with centre at 𝑂
through the closed surface d) A uniformly charged non-conducting
d) None of the above hollow sphere of radius 𝑂𝑃with centre at 𝑂

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 111
opposite to the direction of the dipole
11. What is angle between electric field and moment p
equipotential surface? b) Perpendicular to the axis of the dipole and
a) 90°always b) 0° always is directed away from it
c) Parallel to the dipole moment
c) 0° to 90° d) 0° to 180° d) Perpendicular to the axis of the dipole and
is directed towards it
12. A spherical shell of radius 𝑅 has a
19. An electric dipole has a pair of equal and
charge+𝑞 units. The electric field due to the
opposite point charges q and –q separated by
shell at a point
a distance2𝑥. The axis of the dipole is defined
a) Inside is zero and varies as 𝑟 −1 outside it
as
Inside the constant and varies as 𝑟 −2
b) a) Direction from positive to negative charge
outside it
b) Direction from negative to positive charge
c) Inside is zero and varies as 𝑟 −2 outside it
c) Perpendicular to the line joining the two
Inside is constant and varies as 𝑟 −1 outside charges drawn at the centre and pointing
d)
it upward direction
13. A hollow sphere of charge does not produce d) Perpendicular to the line joining the two
an electric field at any charges drawn at the centre and pointing
a) Interior point b) Outer point downward direction
c) Beyond 2m d) Beyond 10m 20. The electric field due to an extremely short
14. Electric field strength due to a dipole at a dipole at distance 𝑟 from it is proportional to
point on the axial line of dipole is a) 1 b) 1 c) 1 d) 1
𝑟 𝑟 2 𝑟 3 𝑟4
a) From positive charge to negative charge
21. The ratio of electric fields on the axis and at
b) From negative charge to positive charge
equator of an electric dipole will be
c) Along the equatorial line
a) 1:1 b) 2:1 c) 4:1 d) 1:4
d) At an angle to axial line
22. What about Gauss theorem is not incorrect?
15. An electric dipole of the dipole moment p is
a) It can be derived by using Coulomb’s law
placed in a uniform electric field E. The
b) It is valid for conservative field, obeys
maximum torque experienced by the dipole is
inverse square root law
a) b) 𝑃 c) 𝐸 d)
p𝐸 p.E c) Gauss theorem is not applicable in
𝐸 𝑃
16. The relation between the intensity of the gravitation
electric field of an electric dipole at a distance d) Both (a) and (b)
r from its centre on its axis and the distance r 23. A Gaussian sphere encloses an electric dipole
is where (𝑟 ≫ 2𝑙) within it. The total flux across the sphere is
1 1 a) Zero
a) 𝐸 ∝ b) 𝐸 ∝ 2 b) Half that due to a single charge
𝑟 𝑟
1 1 c) Double that due to a single charge
c) 𝐸 ∝ 4 d) 𝐸 ∝ 3
𝑟 𝑟 d) Dependent on the position of the dipole
17. Torque acting on an electric dipole in a 24. The Gaussian surface for calculating the
uniform electric field is maximum if the angle electric field due to a charge distribution is
between p and E is a) Any surface near the charge distribution
a) 180° b) 0° c) 90° d) 45° b) Always a spherical surface
18. The electric field intensity E, due to an electric c) A symmetrical closed surface containing the
dipole of moment p, at a point on the charge distribution, at every point of which
equatorial line is electric field has a single fixed value
a) Parallel to the axis of the dipole and d) None of the given options

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 112
25. Flux coming out from a unit positive charge electrostatic field is zero
enclosed in air is b) The electrostatic field at the surface of the
a) 𝜀0 b) (𝜀0 )−1 c) (4𝜋𝜀0 )−1d) 4𝜋𝜀0 charged conductor must be tangential to
26. An electric dipole of moment p placed in a the surface at any point
uniform electric field E has minimum c) There is no net charge at any point inside
potential energy when the angle between p the conductor
and E is d) Electric field at the surface of a charged
a) b) 𝜋 c) d) 3𝜋 conductor is proportional to the surface
Zero 𝜋
2 2 charge density
27. The magnitude of electric field at distance 𝑟 34. Gauss’s law should be invalid if
from an infinitely thin rod having a linear a) There were magnetic monopoles
charge density 𝜆 is(use Gauss’s law) b) The inverse square law were not exactly
𝜆 2𝜆 true
a) 𝐸 = b) 𝐸 =
2𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 c) The velocity of light were not a universal
𝜆 4𝜆 constant
c) 𝐸 = d) 𝐸 =
4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 d) None of these
28. When a glass rod is rubbed with silk, it
a) Gains electrons from silk
b) Gives electrons to silk ANSWER KEYS(Electric charges and fields)
c) Gains protons from silk 1) c 2) b 3) b
d) Gives protons to silk 4) d 5) a 6) b
7) a 8) c 9) d
29. A body can be negatively charged by 10) c 11) a 12) c
a) Giving excess of electrons to it 13) a 14) b 15) a
b) Removing some electrons from it 16) d 17) c 18) a
c) Giving some protons to it 19) b 20) c 21) b
d) Removing some neutrons from it 22) c 23) a 24) c
30. Electric lines of force about negative point 25) b 26) a 27) a
charge are 28) b 29) a 30) c
a) Circular, anticlockwise 31) a 32) d 33) b
b) Circular, clockwise 34) b
c) Radial, inward
d) Radial, outward
31. The unit of intensity of electric field is
a) 𝑁𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛/𝐶𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏 b) 𝐽𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑒/𝐶𝑜𝑢𝑙𝑜𝑚𝑏
c) 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 − 𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒 d) 𝑁𝑒𝑤𝑡𝑜𝑛/𝑚𝑒𝑡𝑟𝑒
32. The wrong statement about electric lines of
force is
a) These originate from positive charge and
end on negative charge
b) They do not intersect each other at a point
c) They have the same form for a point charge
and a sphere
d) They have physical existence
33. Identify the false statement
a) Inside a charged or neutral conductor

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 113
ELECTRIC POTENTIAL AND d) Directly proportional to the distance
8. Work done in carrying a charge 𝒬′ once round
CAPACITANCE the circle of radius 𝑟 with a charge 𝒬 at the
1. The ratio of electric field and potential (E/V) centre is
at mid-point of electric dipole, for which 1 𝒬 1 𝒬𝒬′
a) b)
separation 𝑙is 4𝜋𝜖0 𝑟 4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟
a) 1/𝑙 b) 𝑙 c) Zero 𝒬𝒬′
d)
c) 2/𝑙 d) None of these 2𝑟
2. The electric potential at centre of metallic 9. The work done in bringing a unit positive
conducting sphere is charge from infinity distance to a point at
a) Zero distance X from a positive charge 𝒬 is W.
b) Half from potential at surface of sphere Then, the potential ϕat the point is
c) Equal from potential at surface of sphere a) 𝑊𝒬 b) c) 𝑊 d)
W 𝑊𝒬
d) Twice from potential at surface of sphere 𝑋 𝒬
10. A hollow metallic sphere of radius R is given a
3. The electric potential inside a conducting
charge𝒬. Then, the potential at the centre is
sphere
a) Zero 1 𝒬
a) Increases from centre to surface b) .
4𝜋𝜀0 𝑅
b) Decreases from centre to surface 1 2𝒬 1 𝒬
c) Remains constant from centre to surface c) . d) .
4𝜋𝜀0 𝑅 4𝜋𝜀0 2𝑅
d) Is zero at every point inside
11. Identify the wrong statement.
4. In bringing an electron towards another
a) In an electric field two equipotential
electron, the electrostatic potential energy of
surfaces can never intersect.
the system
b) A charged particle free to move in an
a) Decreases b) Increases
electric field shall always move in the
c) Remains same d) Becomes zero
direction of E.
5. If a unit positive charge is taken from one
c) Electric field at the surface of a charged
point to another over an equipotential
surface, then conductor is always normal to the surface.
a) Work is done on the charge d) The electric potential decrease along a line
b) Work is done by the charge of force in an electric field.
c) Work done is constant 12. Electric potential at the centre of a charged
d) No work is done hollow metal sphere is
6. Two charges +q and –q are kept apart. Then a) Zero
at any point on the right bisector of line b) Twice as that on the surface
joining the two charges c) Half of that on the surface
a) The electric field strength is zero d) Same as that on the surface
b) The electric potential is zero 13. Identify the wrong statement.
c) Both electric potential and electric field a) The electrical potential energy of a system
strength are zero. of two protons shall increase if the
d) Both electric potential and electric field
separation between the two is decreased.
strength are non-zero.
7. Value of potential at a point due to a point b) The electrical potential energy of a proton-
charge is electron system will increase if the
a) Inversely proportional to square of the separation between the two is decreased.
distance c) The electrical potential energy of a proton-
b) Directly proportional to square of the electron system will increase if the
distance
separation between the two is increased.
c) Inversely proportional to the distance
d) The electrical potential energy of system of

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 114
two electrons shall increase if the c) The total charge increases
separation between the two is decreased. d) The charge and potential difference remain
14. The potential to which a conductor is raised, the same
depends on 21. In a charged capacitor the energy stored in
a) The amount of charge a) The positive charges
b) Geometry and size of the conductor b) The negative charges
c) Both (a) and (b) c) The field between the plates
d) Only on (a) d) None of the above
15. In a parallel plate capacitor , the capacity 22. A sheet of aluminium foil of negligible
increases if thickness is introduced between the plates of
a) Area of the plate is decreased a capacitor. The capacitance of the capacitor
b) Distance between the plates increases a) Decreases b) Remain unchanged
c) Area of the plate is increased c) Becomes infinite d) Increases
d) Dielectric constant decrease
16. A dielectric slab is inserted between the 23. On increasing the plate separation of a
plates of an isolated charged capacitor. Which charged capacitor, the energy
of the following quantities remain a) Increases b) Decreases
unchanged? c) Remains unchanged d) Becomes zero
a) The charge on the capacitor 24. The capacitance of an isolated conducting
b) The stored energy in the capacitor sphere of radius 𝑅is proportional to
c) The potential difference between the plates a) 𝑅 −1 b) 𝑅2 c) 𝑅 −2 d) 𝑅
d) The electric field in the capacitor 25. The energy stored in a capacitor is in the form
17. If dielectric is inserted in charged capacitor of
(battery removed ), then quantity that
a) Kinetic energy b) Potential energy
remains constant is
a) Capacitance b) Potential c) Elastic energy d) Magnetic energy
c) Intensity d) Charge 26. When two conductors of charges and
18. If the plates of a parallel plate capacitor are potentials 𝐶1 , 𝑉1 and𝐶2 , 𝑉2 respectively are
not equal in area, then quantity of charge joined, the common potential will be
a) On the plates will be same but nature of 𝐶1 𝑉1 + 𝐶2 𝑉2 𝐶1 𝑉12 + 𝐶2 𝑉22
a) b)
charge will differ 𝑉1 + 𝑉2 𝑉12 + 𝑉22
b) On the plates as well as nature of charge 𝐶1 𝑉1 + 𝐶2 𝑉2
will be different c) 𝐶1 + 𝐶2 d)
𝐶1 + 𝐶2
c) On the plates will be different but nature of
charge will be same 27. The SI unit of the line integral of electrical
d) As well as nature of charge will be same field I s
19. The capacitance 𝐶 of a capacitor is a) NC−1 b) Nm2 C1 c) JC−1 d) Vm−1
a) Independent of the charge and potential of ANSWER KEYS (Electric potential and
the capacitor capacitors)
b) Dependent on the charge and independent 1) d 2) c 3) c
of potential
4) b 5) d 6) b
c) Independent of the geometrical
configuration of the capacitor 7) c 8) c 9) c
d) Independent of the dielectric medium 10) b 11) c 12) d
between the two conducting surface of the 13) b 14) c 15) c
capacitor 16) a 17) d 18) a
20. A parallel plate capacitor is charged. If the 19) c 20) b 21) c
plates are pulled apart
22) b 23) a 24) d
a) The capacitance increases
25) b 26) d 27) c
b) The potential difference increases

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 115
CURRENT ELECTRICITY c) The resistance of an incandescent lamp is
lesser when the lamp is switched on
1. As the temperature rises the resistance
d) Specific resistance of a wire depends upon
offered by metal
its dimension
a) Increase b) Decrease
7. In which of the following substances does
c) Remains same d) None of these
resistance decrease with increase in
2. Current provided by a battery is maximum
when temperature?
a) Internal resistance equal to external a) Copper b) Carbon
resistance c) Constantan d) Silver
b) Internal resistance is greater than external
resistance 8. 𝑉
For a metallic wire, the ratio (𝑉 =applied
c) Internal resistance is less than external 𝑖
resistance potential difference and 𝑖=current flowing ) is
d) None of these a) Independent of temperature
b) Increases as the temperature rises
3. The resistance of a metal increases with c) Decreases as the temperature rises
increasing temperature because d) Increases or decreases as temperature rises
a) The collisions of the conducting electrons depending upon the metal
with the electrons increase 9. A metal wire is subjected to a constant
b) The collisions of the conducting electrons potential difference. When the temperature of
with the lattice consisting of the ions of the the metal wire increases, the drift velocity of
metal increases the electron in it
c) The number of conduction electrons
a) increases, thermal velocity of the electron
decrease
decreases
d) The number of conduction electrons
b) Decreases, thermal velocity of the electron
increase decreases
4. Metals have
c) increases, thermal velocity of the electron
a) Zero resistivity b) High resistivity increases
c) Low resistivity d) Infinite resistivity d) Decreases, thermal velocity of the electron
5. In the absence of applied potential, the increases
electric current flowing through a metallic
10. With the rise of temperature the resistivity of
wire is zero because a semiconductor
a) The electrons remain stationary a) Remains unchanged
The electrons are drifted in random b) Increases
b) direction with a speed of the order of 10−2 c) Decreases
cms−1 d) First increases and then decreases
c) The electrons move in random direction 11. The resistance of a straight conductor does
with a speed of the order close to that of not depend on its
velocity of light a) Length
d) Electrons and ions move in opposite b) Temperature
direction c) Material
6. Find the true statements d) Shape of cross-section
a) Ohm’s law is applicable to all conductors of 12. The maximum power dissipated in an
electricity external resistance R, when connected to a
b) In an electrolyte solution, the electric cell of emf E and internal resistance r, will be
current is mainly due to the movement of a) 𝐸 2 b) 𝐸 2 c) 𝐸 2 d) 𝐸 2
electrons
𝑟 2𝑟 3𝑟 4𝑟

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 116
13. Kirchoff’s second law for the analysis of P Q
circuit is based on
a) Conversion of charge
b) Conversion of energy R S
c) Conversion of both charge and energy
d) Conversion of momentum of electron 𝑃 𝑅 𝑃 𝑆
14. The kirchoff;s forst law (∑𝑖 = 0)and second a) = b) =
𝑄 𝑆 𝑄 𝑅
law (∑𝑖𝑅 = ∑𝐸 )where the symbols have their 𝑃 𝑄 𝑃 𝑆
usual meanings, are respectively based on c) = d) =
𝑆 𝑅 𝑅 𝑄
a) Conservation of charge, conversion of 19. The drift velocity does not depend upon
momentum a) Cross-section of the wire
b) Conservation of energy, conservation of b) Length of the wire
charge c) Number of free electrons
c) Conservation of momentum, conservation d) Magnitude of the current
of charge
d) Conservation of charge, conservation of 20. Which statement is true?
energy (i) Kirchoff’s law is equally applicable to both
15. It is possible that any some constant value of AC and DC.
emf, but the potential difference between the (ii) Semiconductors have a positive
plates is zero? temperature coefficient of resistance.
a) Not, possible (iii) Meter bridge is greater sensitive when
b) Yes, if another identical battery is joined in the resistance of all four arms of the bridge is
series of the same order.
c) Yes, if another identical battery is joined in (iv) The emf of a cell depends upon the size
opposition and area of electrodes.
d) Yes, possible, if another similar battery is a) (i) and (iv) b) (ii) and (iv)
joined in parallel c) (iii) and (iv) d) None of these
16. Which of the following is vector quantity
a) Current density b) Current
c) Wattless current d) Power 21. Which factor is immaterial for the wire used
in electric fuse?
a) Length b) Radius
17. For measurement of potential difference,
c) Material d) Current
potentiometer is preferred in comparison to
22. What determines the emf between the two
voltmeter because
metals placed in an electrolyte?
a) Potentiometer is more sensitive than
a) Relative position of metals in the electro
voltmeter
chemical series
b) The resistance of potentiometer is less than
b) Distance between them
voltmeter
c) Strength of electrolyte
c) Potentiometer is cheaper than voltmeter
d) Nature of electrolyte
d) Potentiometer does not take current from
23. Electric field (E) and current density (J) have
the circuit
relation
18. In the circuit given, the current relation to a
a) b) c) 1 d) 2 1
balanced Wheatstone’s bridge is 𝐸 ∝ 𝐽 −1 𝐸∝𝐽 𝐸∝ 2 𝐸 ∝
𝐽 𝐽
24. By increasing the temperature, the specific
resistance of a conductor and a
semiconductor

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 117
a) Increases for both b) Decreases for both MOVING CHARGES AND
c) Increases, decreases d) Decreases,increases
25. The reciprocal of resistance is MAGNETISM
a) Conductance b) Resistivity
1. A voltmeter essentially consists of
c) Voltage d) None of the above
a) A high resistance, in series with a
galvanometer
26. When the length and area of cross-section b) A low resistance, in series with a
both are doubled, then its resistance galvanometer
a) Will become half c) A high resistance in parallel with a
b) Will be doubled galvanometer
c) Will remain the same d) A low resistance in parallel with a
d) Will become four times galvanometer
2. A current 𝑖 A flows along an infinitely long
straight thin walled tube, then the magnetic
ANSWER KEYS (Current electricty)
induction at any point inside the tube is
a) Infinite b) Zero
μ0 2𝑖 2𝑖
1) a 2) a 3) b c) . T d) T
4π 𝑟 𝑟
4) c 5) c 6) c 3. The ratio of voltage sensitivity (𝑉𝑆 ) and
7) b 8) b 9) a current sensitivity (𝐼𝑠 ) of a moving coil
10) c 11) d 12) d galvanometer is
13) b 14) d 15) c a) 1 b) 1 c) d) 2
G 𝐺
16) a 17) d 18) d 𝐺 𝐺2
4. A current flows in a conductor from east to
19) b 20) c 21) a
west. The direction of the magnetic field at a
22) a 23) b 24) c point above the conductor is
25) a 26) c a) Towards east b) Towards west
c) Towards north d) Towards south
5. To convert a moving a coil galvanometer
(MCG) into a voltmeter
a) A high resistance R is connected in parallel
with MCG
b) A low resistance r is connected in parallel
with MCG
c) A low resistance r is connected in series
with MCG
d) A high resistance R is connected in series
with MCG
6. The magnetic field near a current carrying
conductor is given by
a) Coulomb’s law b) Lenz’s law
c) Biot-Savart’s law d) Kirchhoff’s law
7. If an ammeter is joined in parallel through a
circuit, it can be damaged due to excess
a) Resistance b) Current
c) Voltage d) None of these
8. A current carrying conductor produces
a) Only electric field
b) Only magnetic field
c) Both electric and magnetic fields

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 118
d) Neither electric nor magnetic field 16. The strength of the magnetic field around a
9. If an ammeter is to be used in place of a long straight wire, carrying current, is
voltmeter, then we must connect with the a) Same everywhere around the wire at any
ammeter a distance
a) Low resistance in parallel b) Inversely proportional to the distance from
b) High resistance in parallel the wire
c) Inversely proportional to the square of the
c) High resistance in series
distance from the wire
d) Low resistance in series d) Directly proportional to the square of the
10. The magnetic induction at the centre of a distance from the wire
current carrying circular of radius 𝑟, is 17. The magnetic field on the axis of a long
a) Directly proportional to 𝑟 solenoid having 𝑛 turns per unit length and
b) Inversely proportional to 𝑟 carrying a current 𝑖 is
c) Directly proportional to 𝑟 2 a) μ0 𝑛𝑖 b) μ0 𝑛2 𝑖
d) Inversely proportional to 𝑟 2 c) μ0 𝑛𝑖 2 d) None of these
11. A voltmeter has a resistance of G ohm and 18. The magnetic induction at a distance 𝑟 from
range V volt. The value of resistance used in the axis of an infinitely straight conductor
series to convert it into a voltmeter of range which carries current 𝑖is
𝑛𝑉 volt is a) μ0 𝑖 b) μ0 𝑖 c) d)
∞ Zero
𝐺 2π𝑟 2𝑟
a) 𝑛𝐺 b) 19. Which of the following while in motion cannot
𝑛
𝐺 be deflected by magnetic field?
c) (𝑛 − 1)𝐺 d)
𝑛−1 a) Protons b) Cathode rays
12. If two parallel wires carry current in opposite c) Alpha particles d) Neutrons
directions 20. Which of the following particles will describe
a) The wires attract each other the smallest circle when projected with the
b) The wires repel each other same velocity perpendicular to the magnetic
c) The wires experience neither attraction nor field?
repulsion a) Electron b) Proton
d) The forces of attraction or repulsion do not c) α − particle d) Deuteron
depend on current direction 21. An electron moves in a circular orbit with a
13. A galvanometer can be converted into a uniform speed 𝑣. It produces a magnetic field
voltmeter by connecting 𝐵 at the centre of the circle. The radius of the
a) Low residence in parallel circle is proportional to
b) Low residence in series a) 𝐵 b) 𝑣 c) d)
𝑣 𝐵
c) High residence in parallel √ √
𝑣 𝐵 𝐵 𝑣
d) High residence in series
14. A wire oriented in the east-west direction 22. A charged particle enters a magnetic field 𝐻
carries a current eastward. Direction of the with its initial velocity making an angle of 45°
magnetic field at a point to the south of the with 𝐻. The path of the particle will be
wire is a) A straight line b) A circle
a) Vertically down b) Vertically up c) An ellipse d) A helix
c) North-east d) South-east
15. By mistake a voltmeter is connected in series 23. A charged particle enters in a magnetic field
and an ammeter is connected in parallel with whose direction is parallel to velocity of the
a resistance in an electrical circuit. What will particle, then the speed of this particle
happen to the instrument? a) In straight line b) In coiled path
a) Voltmeter is damaged c) In circular path d) In ellipse path
b) Ammeter is damaged
c) Both are damaged 24. Under the influence of a uniform magnetic
d) None is damaged field a charged particle is moving in a circle of

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 119
radius 𝑅 with constant speed 𝑣. The time c) d)
period of the motion
a) Depends on 𝑣 and not on 𝑅
b) Depends on both 𝑅and 𝑣
c) Is independent of both 𝑅and 𝑣
d) Depends on 𝑅 and not on 𝑣 31. An electron and a proton enter a magnetic
25. The magnetic force on a charged particle field perpendicularly. Both have same kinetic
moving in the field does not work, because
energy. Which of the following is true?
a) Kinetic energy of the charged particle does
not change a) Trajectory of electron is less curved
b) The charge of the particle remains same b) Trajectory of proton is less curved
c) The magnetic force is parallel to velocity of c) Both trajectories are equally curved
the particle d) Both move on straight line path
d) The magnetic force is parallel to magnetic 32. A current carrying circular loop is freely
field suspended by a long thread. The plane of the
26. The force between two parallel current
loop will point in the direction
carrying wires is independent of
a) Their distance of separation a) Wherever left free
b) The length of the wires b) North-south
c) The magnitude of currents c) East-west
d) The radii of the wires d) At 45° with the east-west direction
27. The magnetic moment of a circular coil 33. The coil of a moving coil galvanometer is
carrying current is wound over a metal frame in order to
a) Directly proportional to the length of the a) Reduce hysteresis
wire in the coil b) Provide electromagnetic damping
b) Inversely proportional to the length of the c) Increase the moment of inertia
wire in the coil d) Increase the sensitivity
c) Directly proportional to the square of the 34. The deflection in a moving coil galvanometer
length of the wire in the coil is
d) Inversely proportional to the square of the a) Directly proportional to the torsional
length f the wire in the coil constant
b) Directly proportional to the number of
28. The magnetic dipole moment of a current loop turns in the coil
is independent of c) Inversely proportional to the area of the
a) Magnetic field in which it is lying
b) Number of turns coil
c) Area of the loop d) Inversely proportional to the current
d) Current in the loop flowing
29. If a current is passed in a spring, it 35. If a copper rod carries a direct current, the
a) Gets compressed magnetic field associated with the current will
b) Get expanded be
c) Oscillates
a) Only inside the rod
d) Remains unchanged
30. The magnetic flux density 𝐵at a distance𝑟from b) Only outside the rod
a long straight rod carrying a steady current c) Both inside and outside the rod
varies with r as shown in figure. d) Neither inside nor outside the rod
a) b) 36. A magnetic field can be produced by
a) A moving charge
b) A changing electric field
c) None of these

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 120
d) Both of these b) A force perpendicular to the magnetic field
37. The direction of magnetic lines of force c) A force in an arbitrary direction
produced by passing a direct current in a d) No force
conductor is given by 47. Lorentz force can be calculated by using the
a) Lenz’s law formula
b) Fleming’ left hand rule a) 𝐹⃗ = 𝑞(𝐸⃗⃗ + 𝑣⃗ × 𝐵
⃗⃗) b) 𝐹⃗ = 𝑞(𝐸⃗⃗ − 𝑣⃗ × 𝐵
⃗⃗)
c) Right hand palm rule c) 𝐹⃗ = 𝑞(𝐸⃗⃗ + 𝑣⃗ ∙ 𝐵
⃗⃗) d) 𝐹⃗ = 𝑞(𝐸⃗⃗ × 𝐵
⃗⃗ + 𝑣⃗)
d) Maxwell’s law 49. The magnetic moment of a circular coil
38. Field inside a solenoid is carrying current is
a) Directly proportional to its length a) Directly proportional to the length of the
b) Directly proportional to current wire in the coil
c) Inversely proportional to total number of b) Inversely proportional to the length of the
turns wire in the coil
d) Inversely proportional to current c) Directly proportional to the square of the
39. The magnetic field at the centre of current length of the wire in the coil
carrying coil is d) Inversely proportional to the square of the
a) 𝜇0 𝑛𝑖 b) 𝜇0 𝑛𝑖 c) 𝜇0 𝑛𝑖 d) length f the wire in the coil
𝜇0 𝑛𝑖
2𝑟 2𝜋 𝑟 4𝑟
40. Ampere’s circuital law is equivalent to
a) Biot-Savart law b) Coulomb’s law ANSWER KEYS (Moving charges)
c) Faraday’s law d) Kirchhoff’s law
41. A current carrying wire in the neighborhood
produces 1) a 2) b 3) a
a) No field 4) c 5) d 6) c
b) Electric field only 7) b 8) b 9) c
c) Magnetic field only 10) b 11) c 12) b
d) Electric and magnetic field 13) d 14) a 15) d
42. The dimension of the magnetic field intensity 16) b 17) a 18) a
𝐵 is 19) d 20) a 21) c
a) 𝑀𝐿𝑇 −2 𝐴−1 b) 𝑀𝑇 −2 𝐴−1 22) d 23) a 24) c
c) 𝑀𝐿2 𝑇𝐴−2 d) 𝑀2 𝐿𝑇 −2 𝐴−1 25) a 26) d 27) c
43. Magnetic effect of current was discovered by 28) a 29) a 30) d
a) Faraday b) Oersted c) Ampere d) Bohr 31) b 32) c 33) b
44. A charge 𝑞 is moving in a magnetic field then 34) b 35) c 36) d
the magnetic force does not depend upon 37) c 38) b 39) a
a) Charge b) Mass 40) a 41) c 42) b
c) Velocity d) Magnetic field 43) b 44) b 45) b
45. A positive charge is moving towards an 46) d 47) a
observer. The direction of magnetic induction
is
a) Clockwise b) Anticlockwise
c) Right d) Left
46. A very high magnetic field is applied to a
stationary charge. Then the charge
experiences
a) A force in the direction of magnetic field

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 121
MAGNETISM AND MATTER c) Both torque and net force are absent
d) Net force is present but not torque
1. In which direction, the magnetic field on the
axis at a distance z from the centre of the bar 8. A magnetic dipole is placed in a uniform
magnet would be? magnetic field. The net magnetic force on the
a) In the perpendicular direction of the dipole
magnetic moment (M) of the magnet a) Is always zero
b) In the direction of the magnetic dipole b) Depends on the orientation of the dipole
moment (M) of the magnet c) Can never be zero
c) Its direction depends on the magnitude of d) Depends on the strength of the dipole
the magnetic moment (M) of the magnet 09. Magnetic moment of bar magnet is M. The
d) In the opposite direction of the magnetic work done to turn the magnet by 90° of
dipole moment(M) of the magnet magnet in direction of magnetic field B will be
2. The magnetic lines of force inside a bar a) b) 1 c) d)
magnet Zero 𝑀𝐵 2 𝑀𝐵 MB
2
a) Are from north-pole to south-pole of the 10. The ultimate individual unit of magnetism is
magnet any magnet is called
b) Do not exist a) North pole b) South pole
c) Depend upon the area of cross-section of c) Dipole d) Quadrupole
the bar magnet
11. The magnetic susceptibility of paramagnetic
d) Are from south-pole to north-pole of the
materials is
magnet
a) Positive, but very high
3. At a point on the right bisector of a magnetic
dipole magnetic b) Negative, but very small
a) Potential varies as 2
1 c) Negative, but very high
𝑟
d) Positive, but small
b) Potential is zero at all points on the right
bisector
12. If a ferromagnetic material is inserted in a
c) Field varies as 𝑟 2
current carrying solenoid, the magnetic field
d) Field is perpendicular to the axis of dipole of solenoid
4. A bar magnet is equivalent to a) Large increases b) Slightly increases
a) Torroid carrying current c) Largely decreases d) Slightly decreases
b) Straight conductor carrying current 13. On applying an external magnetic field, to a
c) Solenoid carrying current ferromagnetic substance domains
d) Circular coil carrying current a) Align in the direction of magnetic field
5. A current carrying small loop behaves like a b) Align in the direction opposite to magnetic
small magnet. If A be its area and M its field
magnetic moment, the current in the loop will c) Remain unaffected
be d) None of the above
a) M/A b) A/M c) MA d) 𝐴𝑀2 14. Magnetic susceptibility of a diamagnetic
6. The magnetic field of a small bar magnet substance
varies in the following manner by the a) Decreases with temperature
influence of a magnet placed at a large b) Is not affected by temperature
distance d. c) Increases with temperature
a) 1 b) 1 c) 1 d) 1
2 d) First increase then decrease with
𝑑 𝑑 𝑑 3 𝑑4 temperature
7. The effect due to uniform magnetic field on a
15. Which one of the following characteristics is
freely suspended magnetic needle is as
not associated with a ferromagnetic material?
follows
a) It is strongly attracted by a magnet
a) Both torque and net force are present
b) It tends to move from a region of strong
b) Torque is present but no net force
magnetic field to a region of low magnetic

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 122
field then magnetic induction can be expressed in
c) Its origin is the spin of electrons a) 𝑊𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟/𝑚 2 b) 𝑊𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟/𝑚
d) Above the Curie temperature, it exhibits c) 𝑊𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟-𝑚 d) 𝑊𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟-𝑚 2
paramagnetic properties 26. Domain formation is the necessary feature of
16. If a magnetic substance is kept in a magnetic a) Ferromagnetism b) Paramagnetism
field then which of the following substance is
c) Diamagnetism d) All of these
thrown out?
a) Paramagnetic b) Ferromagnetic
ANSWER KEYS (Magnetism and matter)
c) Diamagnetic d) Antiferromagnetic
17. Water is
a) Diamagnetic b) Paramagnetic 1) a 2) d 3) a
c) Ferromagnetic d) None of these 4) c 5) a 6) c
18. To shield an instrument from external 7) b 8) a 9) a
magnetic field, it is placed inside a cabin made 10) c 11) d 12) a
of
13) a 14) b 15) b
a) Wood
16) c 17) a 18) c
b) Ebonite
19) a 20) c 21) d
c) Iron
22) b 23) a 24) c
d) Diamagnetic substance
25) a 26) a
19. The relation between 𝐵, 𝐻 and𝐼 in SI unit is
a) 𝐵 = μ0 (𝐻 + 𝐼) b) 𝐵 = 𝐻 + 4μ𝐼
c) 𝐻 = μ0 (𝐵 + 𝐼) d) None of these
20. 𝑊𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟/𝑚2 is equal to
a) 𝑉𝑜𝑙𝑡 b) 𝐻𝑒𝑛𝑟𝑦
c) 𝑇𝑒𝑠𝑙𝑎 d) All of these
21. The magnet can be completely demagnetized
by
a) Breaking the magnet into small pieces
b) Heating it slightly
c) Droping it into ice cold water
d) A reverse field of appropriate strength
22. Magnetic dipole moment is a
a) Scalar quantity b) Vector quantity
c) Constant quantity d) None of these
23. Magnetic lines of force due to a bar magnet do
not intersect because
a) A point always has a single net magnetic
field
b) The lines have similar charges and so repel
each other
c) The lines always diverge from a single point
d) The lines need magnetic lenses to be made
to intersect

24. A bar magnet of magnetic moment 𝑀 ⃗⃗⃗ is

placed in a magnetic field of induction 𝐵 ⃗⃗. The
torque exerted on it is
a) 𝑀⃗⃗⃗. 𝐵
⃗⃗ b) −𝑀 ⃗⃗⃗. 𝐵
⃗⃗ c) 𝑀 ⃗⃗ d) 𝐵
⃗⃗⃗ × 𝐵 ⃗⃗ × 𝑀 ⃗⃗⃗
25. If the magnetic flux is expressed in 𝑤𝑒𝑏𝑒𝑟,

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 MCQ’S 123
ELECTRO MAGNETIC INDUCTION b) Law of conservation of energy
c) Law of conservation of momentum
1. Two coils are placed close to each other. The
d) Law of conservation of angular momentum
mutual inductance of the pair of coils
9. According to Lenz’s law of electromagnetic
depends upon
induction
a) The rates at which currents are changing in
a) The induced emf is not in the direction
the two coils
opposing the change in magnetic flux.
b) Relative position and orientation of the
b) The relative motion between the coil and
two coils
magnet produces change in magnetic flux
c) The materials of the wires of the coils
c) Only the magnet should be moved towards
d) The currents in the two coils
coil
2. Whenever a magnet is moved either towards
d) Only the coil should be moved towards
or away from a conducting coil, an emf is
magnet
induced, the magnitude of which is
10. Induced emf in the coil depends upon
independent of
a) Conductivity of coil
a) The strength of the magnetic field
b) Amount of flux
b) The speed with which the magnet is moved
c) Rate of change of linked flux
c) The number of turns is the coil
d) Resistance of coil
d) The resistance of the coil
11. The induction coil works on the principle of
3. Energy associated with a moving charge is a) Self-induction
due to b) Mutual induction
a) Electric field b) Magnetic field c) Ampere’s rule
c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these d) Fleming’s right hand rule
4. If coil is open then L and R become 12. Electric fields induced by changing magnetic
a) ∞, 0 b) 0, ∞ c) ∞, ∞ d) 0, 0 fields are
a) Conservative
5. Two similar circular loops carry equal
b) Non-conservative
currents in the same direction. On moving c) May be conservative or non-conservative
coils further apart, the electric current will depending on the condition
a) Increase in both d) Nothing can be said
b) Decrease in both 13. Quantity that remains unchanged in a
c) Remain unaltered transformer is
d) Increases in one and decreases in the a) Voltage b) Current
c) Frequency d) None of these
second
14. The transformation ratio in the step-up
6. Voltage in the secondary coil of a transformer transformer is
does not depend upon a) One
a) Voltage in the primary coil b) Greater than one
b) Ratio of number of turns in the two coils c) Less than one
c) Frequency of the source d) The ratio greater or less than one depends
d) Both (a) and (b) on the other factors
15. The efficiency of transformer is very high
7. The net magnetic flux through any closed because
surface, kept in a magnetic field is a) There is no moving part in a transformer
a) b) μ0 c) d) 4μ0 b) It produces very high voltage
Zero 4πμ0
4𝜋 𝜋 c) It produces very low voltage
8. Lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction d) None of the above
corresponds to the
a) Law of conservation of charge

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 MCQ’S 124
electromagnetic induction
16. Fleming’s left and right hand rule are used in a) The direction of induced current is such
a) DC motor and AC generator that it opposes the cause producing it
b) The magnitude of induced e.m.f. produced
b) DC generator and AC motor
in a coil is directly proportional to the rate
c) DC motor and DC generator of change of magnate flux
d) Both rules are same, any one can be used c) The direction of induced e.m.f. is such that
it opposes the cause producing it
17. Which type of losses donot occur in the d) None of the above
transformer? 25. Lenz’s law is expressed by the following
a) Iron losses b) Copper losses formula (here 𝑒 =induced e.m.f.,
c) Mechanical losses d) Flux leakage 𝜙 =magnetic flux in one turn and 𝑁 =
18. A transformer works on the principle of number of turns)
𝑑𝑁 𝑑𝜙
a) Magnetic effect of the electrical current a) 𝑒 = −𝜙 b) 𝑒 = −𝑁
b) Mutual induction 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝑑 𝜙 𝑑𝜙
c) Electrical inertia c) 𝑒 = − ( ) d) 𝑒 = 𝑁
𝑑𝑡 𝑁 𝑑𝑡
d) Self induction 26. The formula for induced e.m.f. in a coil due to
19. The particle accelerator that uses the change in magnetic flux through the coil is
phenomenon of electromagnetic induction is (here 𝐴=area of the coil, 𝐵 = magnetic field)
the 𝑑𝐵 𝑑𝐴
a) 𝑒 = −𝐴. b) 𝑒 = −𝐵.
a) Cyclotron 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
b) Betatron 𝑑 𝑑
c) 𝑒 = − (𝐴. 𝐵) d) 𝑒 = − (𝐴 × 𝐵)
c) Van de Graff generator 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡
27. Faraday’s laws are consequence of
d) Cockroft- Walton generator conservation of
20. Lenz’s law is statement of a) Energy
a) Law of conservation of charge b) Energy and magnetic field
b) Law of conservation of current c) Charge
c) Law of conservation of energy d) Magnetic field
d) None of the above 28. The north pole of a magnet is brought near a
21. The total charge, induced in a conducting metallic ring. The direction of the induced
loop, when it is moved in a magnetic field current in the ring will be
depends on a) Clockwise b) Anticlockwise
a) Rate of change of magnetic on c) Towards north d) Towards south
b) Initial magnetic flux only 29. The magnetic flux linked with a vector area 𝐴⃗
c) Total change in magnetic flux and in a uniform magnetic field 𝐵 ⃗⃗ is
resistance a) ⃗⃗ ⃗ b) c) ⃗⃗ ⃗ d) 𝐵
d) Final magnetic flux only 𝐵×𝐴 𝐴𝐵 𝐵∙𝐴
𝐴
22. A moving conductor coil in a magnetic field 30. The self inductance of a straight conductor is
produces an induced e.m.f. This is in a) Zero b) Very large
accordance with
c) Infinity d) Very small
a) Ampere’s law b) Coulomb’s law
31. In what form is the energy stored in an
c) Lenz’s law d) Faraday’s law
inductor or
23. Lenz’s law gives A coil of inductance 𝐿 is carrying a steady
a) The magnitude of the induced e.m.f. current 𝑖. What is the nature of its stored
b) The direction of the induced current energy
c) Both the magnitude and direction of the a) Magnetic
induced current b) Electrical
d) The magnitude of the induced current c) Both magnetic and electrical
24. According to Faraday’s law of d) Heat

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 MCQ’S 125
32. Why the current does not rise immediately in ANSWER KEYS(EMI)
a circuit containing inductance 1) b 2) d 3) c
a) Because of induced emf 4) b 5) a 6) c
b) Because of high voltage drop 7) a 8) b 9) b
c) Because of low power consumption 10) c 11) b 12) b
d) Because of Joule heating 13) c 14) b 15) a
16) c 17) c 18) b
33. Self induction of a solenoid is 19) b 20) c 21) c
a) Directly proportional to current flowing 22) d 23) b 24) b
through the coil 25) b 26) c 27) a
b) Directly proportional to its length 28) b 29) c 30) a
c) Directly proportional to area of cross- 31) a 32) a 33) c
section 34) d 35) c 36) b
d) Inversely proportional to area of cross- 37) b 38) b
section
34. The average power dissipation in pure
inductance is
a) 1 2 b) c) 1 2 d)
𝐿𝐼 2𝐿𝐼2 𝐿𝐼 Zero
2 4
35. The square root of the product of inductance
and capacitance has the dimension of
a) Length b) Mass
c) Time d) No dimension
36. Mutual inductance of two coils can be
increased by
a) Decreasing the number of turns in the coils
b) Increasing the number of turns in the coils
c) Winding the coils on wooden core
d) None of the above
37. When the speed of a dc motor increases the
armature current
a) Increases
b) Decreases
c) Does not change
d) Increases and decreases continuously
38. What is increased in step-down transformer
a) Voltage b) Current
c) Power d) Current density

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 126
ALTERNATING CURRENT b) Vector
c) Zero
1. At high frequency, the capacitor offer
d) None of these
a) More reactance b) Less reactance
10. In an ac circuit with voltage 𝑉 and current 𝐼,
c) Zero reactance d) Infinite reactance the power dissipated is
2. Average power in the L-C-Rcircuit depends a) 𝑉𝐼
upon 1
b) 𝑉𝐼
a) Current 2
b) phase difference only 1
c) 𝑉𝐼
c) Emf √2
d) Current, emf and phase difference d) Depends on the phases between 𝑉 and 𝐼
3. What is the average value of the AC voltage 11. The ratio of peak value and 𝑟. 𝑚. 𝑠. value of an
alternating current is
over one complete cycle?
a) b) 1 c) d)
a) b) c) 2𝑉max d) 𝑉max 1 √2 1/√2
Zero 𝑉max 2
𝜋 2 12. The resistance of a coil for dc is in ohms. In ac,
4. In a circuit, the current lags behind the the resistance
voltage by a phase difference of 𝜋/2, the a) Will remain same b) Will increase
circuit will contain which of the following? c) Will decrease d) Will be zero
a) Only R b) Only C c) R and C d) Only L 13. In an ac circuit, the 𝑟. 𝑚. 𝑠. value of current,
5. The power loss in AC circuit will be minimum 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 is related to the peak current, 𝐼0 by the
when relation
1 1
a) Resistance is high, inductance is high a) 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = 𝐼0 b) 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = 𝐼0
b) Resistance is high, inductance is low 𝜋 √2
c) 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = √2𝐼0 d) 𝐼𝑟𝑚𝑠 = 𝜋𝐼0
c) Resistance is low, inductance is low
14. The root mean square value of the alternating
d) None of the above
current is equal to
6. An inductor is connected to an AC source. a) Twice the peak value
When compared to voltage , the current in the b) Half the peak value
lead wires 1
c) √2 times the peak value
a) Is ahead in phase by 𝜋
d) Equal to the peak value
b) Lags in phase by 𝜋
𝜋 15. The voltage of domestic ac is 220 𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡. What
c) Is ahead in phase by 2 does the represent
𝜋
d) Lags in phase by 2 a) Mean voltage
7. SI unit of magnetic flux is b) Peak voltage
a) Tesla c) Root mean voltage
b) Oersted d) Root mean square voltage
c) Gauss 16. In general in an alternating current circuit
d) Weber a) The average value of current is zero
8. The current which does not contribute to the b) The average value of square of the current
is zero
power consumed in an AC circuit is called
c) Average power dissipation is zero
a) non-ideal current
d) The phase difference between voltage and
b) wattles current current is zero
c) convectional current 17. For series 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit, wrong statement is
d) inductance current Applied 𝑒.m.f. and potential difference
a)
across resistance are in same phase
9. Magnetic flux is b)
Applied 𝑒.m.f. and potential difference at
a) Scalar inductor coil have phase difference of 𝜋/2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 127
Potential difference at capacitor and c) Is always in phase with the voltage
c)
inductor have phase difference of 𝜋/2 d) May lead or lag behind or be in phase with
Potential difference across resistance and the voltage
d)
capacitor have phase difference of 𝜋/2
18. In an ac circuit, the power factor
a) Is zero when the circuit contains an ideal
resistance only
b) Is unity when the circuit contains an ideal
resistance only
c) Is unity when the circuit contains an ideal
inductance only
d) Is unity when the circuit contains an ideal
capacitor only
19. The power factor of good choke coil is
a) Nearly zero b) Exactly zero
c) Nearly one d) Exactly one
20. An 𝐿𝐶𝑅 series circuit is at resonance. Then
The phase difference between current and
a)
voltage is 90°
The phase difference between current and ANSWER KEYS( AC )
b)
voltage is 45° 1) b 2) d 3) a
c) Its impedance is purely resistive 4) b 5) c 6) d
d) Its impedance is zero 7) d 8) b 9) a
21. Power factor is maximum in an 𝐿𝐶𝑅 circuit 10) d 11) c 12) b
when 13) b 14) c 15) d
a) 𝑋𝐿 = 𝑋𝐶 b) 𝑅 = 0 c) 𝑋𝐿 = 0 d) 𝑋𝐶 = 0 16) a 17) c 18) b
22. The average power dissipated in a pure 19) a 20) c 21) a
inductor of inductance 𝐿 when an ac current 22) d 23) a 24) b
is passing through it, is 25) d
(Inductance of the coil 𝐿 and current 𝐼)
a) 1 2 b) 1 2 c) d)
𝐿𝐼 𝐿𝐼 2 𝐿𝑖 2 Zero
2 4
23. A choke coil has
a) High inductance and low resistance
b) Low inductance and high resistance
c) High inductance and high resistance
d) Low inductance and low resistance
24. In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current
a) Lags behind the 𝑒.m.f. in phase
b) Is in phase with the 𝑒.m.f.
c) Leads the 𝑒.m.f. in phase
Leads the 𝑒.m.f. in half the cycle and lags
d)
behind it in the other half
25. In an 𝐴. 𝐶. circuit the current
a) Always leads the voltage
b) Always lags behind the voltage

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 128
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES c) Displacement d) Impedance
current
1. If 𝜇0 is permeability of free space and 𝜀0 is 10. The speed of electromagnetic Wave in
permittivity of free space, the speed of light in vacuum depends upon the source radiation. It
vacuum is given by Increases as we move from 𝛾 − 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 to
a)
a) b) 𝜇 c) d) 𝜀 radio waves
0 1 0
√𝜇0 𝜀0 √ √ √ Decreases as we move from 𝛾 − 𝑟𝑎𝑦𝑠 to
𝜀0 𝜇0 𝜀0 𝜇0 b)
radio waves
2. According to Maxwell’s hypothesis, changing c) Is same for all of them
electric field gives rise to d) None of the above
a) Magnetic field b) Pressure gradient 11. What is order of energy of X-rays (EX), radio
c) Charge d) Voltage waves (ER) and microwave (EM)?
3. An Electromagnetic Wave has a) EX < ER <EM b) EX < EM >ER
a) Electric vector only c) EM > EX >ER d) EM < ER <EX
b) Magnetic vector only 12. All components of the Electromagnetic
c) Electric and Magnetic vector Perpendicular Spectrum in vacuum have the same
to each other a) Energy b) Velocity
d) Neither the Electric vector nor the Magnetic c) Wavelength d) Frequency
vector 13. An electromagnetic radiation has an energy of
4. In a medium of dielectric constant 𝐾, the 13.2 keV. Then the radiation belongs to the
electric field is E. If 𝜀0 is permittivity of the region of
free space, the electric displacement vector is a) Visible light b) Ultraviolet
a) 𝐾𝐄 b) 𝐄 c) 𝜀0 𝐄 d) c) Infrared d) X-ray
𝐾𝜀0 𝐄
𝜀0 𝐾𝜀0 𝐾 14. The Maxwell’s four equations are written as
5. Electromagnetic Waves can be deflected by (i)∮ 𝐄⃗⃗ ∙ ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐝𝐬 = q/ε0
a) Electric field only ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = 0
⃗⃗⃗ ∙ 𝐝𝐬
(ii)∮ 𝐁
b) Magnetic field only d
(iii)∮ 𝐄 ∙ ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐝𝐥 = − ∮s⃗𝐁 ⃗⃗ ∙ ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐝𝐬
c) Both (a) and (b) dt
𝑑
d) None of these ⃗⃗ ∙ ⃗⃗⃗⃗
(iv)∮ ⃗𝐁 ⃗⃗. ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐝𝐥 = 𝜇0 𝐼 + μ0 ε0 𝑑𝑡 ∮s𝐄 𝐝𝐬
6. The average value of electric energy density The equation which have sources of 𝐄 ⃗⃗and 𝐁
⃗⃗⃗
in an Electromagnetic Waves is (E0 is peak
are
value)
a) (i), (ii), (iii) b) (i), (ii)
a) 1 b) 𝐸02 c) d) 1
𝜀0 𝐸02 𝜀0 𝐸02 𝜀 𝐸2 c) (i)and (iii) only d) (i)and (iv) only
2 2𝜀0 4 0 0 15. The oscillating electric and magnetic field
7. The frequency 1057 MHz of radiation arising vectors of electromagnetic wave are oriented
from two close energy levels in hydrogen along
belongs to a) The same direction and in phase
a) Radio waves b) Infrared waves The same direction but have a phase
c) Micro waves d) 𝛾 − rays b)
difference of 90°
8. In an Electromagnetic Wave, direction of c) Mutually perpendicular directions and are
propagation is in the direction of in phase
a) E b) B Mutually perpendicular directions but has a
c) 𝐄 × 𝐁 d) None of these d)
phase difference of 90°
9. Maxwell in his famous equation of 16. Which of the following has zero average value
electromagnetism introduced the concept in a plane electromagnetic wave?
a) AC current b) DC current a) Kinetic energy b) Magnetic field

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 129
c) Electric field d) Both (b) and (c)

17. The unit of expression μ0 ε0 are ANSWER KEYS ( EMW )

a) ms−1 b) m2 s−2 c) s2 m−2 d) sm−1
18. An electromagnetic wave, going through 1) c 2) a 3) c
vacuum is described by 𝐸 = 𝐸0 sin(𝑘𝑥 − ω𝑡) 4) d 5) d 6) d
Which of the following is independent of 7) b 8) c 9) c
wavelength? 10) c 11) b 12) b
a) 𝑘 b) ω c) 𝑘/ω d) 𝑘ω 13) d 14) d 15) c
19. The wavelength of X-rays lies between 16) d 17) c 18) c
a) Maximum to finite limits 19) b 20) a 21) d
b) Minimum to certain limits 22) c 23) b 24) d
c) Minimum to infinite limits 25) d
d) Infinite to finite limits
20. X-ray are not used for radar purpose, because
they are not
a) Reflected by target
b) Partly absorbed by target
c) Electromagnetic waves
d) Completely absorbed by target
21. Which of the following rays is emitted by a
human body?
a) X-rays b) UV rays
c) Visible rays d) IR rays
22. Which of the following electromagnetic waves
have the longest wavelength?
a) Heat waves b) Light waves
c) Radio waves d) Ultraviolet waves
23. X-rays are produced by jumping of
a) Electrons from lower to higher energy orbit
of atom
b) Electrons from higher to lower energy orbit
of atom
c) Protons from lower to higher energy orbit
of nucleus
d) Proton from higher to lower energy orbit of
nucleus
24. If 𝑣𝑠 , 𝑣𝑥 and 𝑣𝑚 are the speeds of gamma rays,
X-rays and microwaves respectively in
vacuum, then
a) 𝑣𝑠 > 𝑣𝑥 > 𝑣𝑚 b) 𝑣𝑠 < 𝑣𝑥 < 𝑣𝑚
c) 𝑣𝑠 < 𝑣𝑥 < 𝑣𝑚 d) 𝑣𝑠 = 𝑣𝑥 = 𝑣𝑚
25. Out of the following electromagnetic
radiation, which has the shortest wavelength?
a) Radiowaves b) Infrared
c) Ultraviolet d) X-rays

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 130
RAY OPTICS 11. To a fish under water, viewing obliquely a
fisherman standing on the bank of the lake,
1. A plane mirror produces a magnification of
the man looks
a) -1 b) +1 c) Zero d) Infinite
a) Taller than what he actually is
2. Which mirror is to be used to obtain a parallel
b) Shorter that what he actual is
beam of light from a small lamp?
a) Plane mirror b) Convex mirror c) The same height as he actually is
c) Concave mirror d) Any one of these d) Depends on the obliquity
3. The focal length (𝑓) of a spherical (concave or 12. When a plane electromagnetic wave enters a
convex) mirror of radius of curvature 𝑅 is glass slab, then which of the following will not
a) 𝑅 b) c) 3 d) change?
𝑅 ( )𝑅 2𝑅 a) Wavelength b) Frequency
2 2
4. A person sees his virtual image by holding a c) Speed d) Amplitude
mirror very close to the face. When he moves 13. Why is refractive index in a transparent
the mirror away from his face, the image medium greater than one?
becomes inverted. What type of mirror he is a) Because the speed of light in vacuum is
using? medium
a) Plane mirror b) Convex mirror b) Because the speed of light in vacuum is
c) Concave mirror d) None of these always greater than speed in a transparent
5. A man having height 6 m, observes image of 2 medium
m height erect, then mirror used is c) Frequency of wave changes when it crosses
a) Concave b) Convex medium
d) None of the above
c) Plane d) None of the above
14. When light enters water from the vacuum,
6. For a real object, which of the following can
then the wavelength of light
produced a real image?
a) Decreases b) Increases
a) Plane mirror b) Concave lens
c) Remain constant d) Becomes zero
c) Convex mirror d) Concave mirror
15. Critical angle of light passing from glass of
7. When light travels from glass to air, the
water is minimum for
incident angle is θ1 and the refracted angle is
a) Red colour b) Green colour
θ2 . The true relation is
a) θ1 = θ2 b) θ1 < θ2 c) Yellow colour d) Violet colour
c) θ1 > θ2 d) Not predictable 16. The instrument used by doctors for endoscopy
works on the principle of
8. A light moves from denser to rarer medium.
a) Total internal reflection
Which of the following is correct?
a) Energy increases b) Reflection
b) Frequency increases c) Refraction
c) Phase changes by 90° d) None of the above
d) Velocity increases 17. The communication using optical fibres is
based on the principle of
9. When a ray of light enters a glass slab from air
a) Total internal reflection
a) Its wavelength decreases
b) Brewster angle
b) Its wavelength increases
c) Polarization
c) Its frequency increases
d) Resonance
d) Neither its wavelength nor its frequency
18. Transmission of light to large distances
changes
10. When a ray of light is incident normally on a through optical fibres is based on
surface, then a) Dispersion
a) Total internal reflection takes place b) Refraction
b) It passes undeviated c) Total internal reflection
c) It undergoes dispersion d) Interference
d) It gets absorbed by the surface 19. Which of the following is not the case with the

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 131
image formed by a concave lens? 27. An electron microscope is superior to an
a) It may be erect or inverted optical microscope in
b) It may be magnified and diminished a) Having better resolving power
c) It may be real or virtual b) Being easy to handle
d) Real image may be between the pole and c) Low cost
focus or beyond focus d) Quickness of observation
20. Image formed by a convex lens is virtual and 28. Near and far points of human eye are
erect when the object is placed a) 25 cm and infinite b) 50 cm and 100 cm
a) At 𝐹 c) 25 cm and 50 cm d) 0 cm and 25 cm
b) Between 𝐹 and the lens 29. In a compound microscope, the intermediate
c) At 2𝐹 image is
d) Beyond 2𝐹 a) Virtual erect and magnified
21. When sunlight is incident on a prism, it b) Real, erect and magnified
produces a spectrum due to c) Real, inverted and magnified
a) Interference of light d) Virtual, erect and reduced
b) Diffraction of light 30. An astronomical telescope has a large
c) Total internal reflection aperture to
d) Variation in speeds of different colours of a) Reduce spherical aberration
light in the prism b) Have high resolution
22. A monochromatic light is passed through a c) Increase span of observation
prism………..colours shows minimum d) Have low dispersion
deviation 31. If the apertaure of a telescope is decreased the
a) Red b) Violet c) Yellow d) Green
resolving power will
23. An achromatic combination of lenses produces
a) Increase b) Decrease
a) Images in black and white
c) Remain same d) Zero
b) Coloured images
32. A plane mirror reflects a pencil of light to form
c) Images unaffected by variation of refractive
a real image. Then the pencil of light incident
index with wavelength
d) Highly enlarged images are formed on the mirror is
24. In order to increase the angular magnification a) parallel
of a simple microscope, one should increase b) convergent
a) The object size c) divergent
b) The aperture of the lens d) Any of these
c) The focal length of the lens 33. The light reflected by a plane mirror may form
d) The power of the lens a real image
25. Spherical aberration in a lens a) If the rays incident on the mirror are
a) Is minimum when most of the deviation is diverging
at the first surface b) If the rays incident on the mirror are
b) Is minimum when most of the deviation is converging
at the second surface c) If the object is placed very close to the
c) Is minimum when the total deviation is
mirror
equally distributed over the two surfaces
d) Does not depend on the above d) Under no circumstances
considerations 34. A diminished virtual image can be formed only
in
a) Plane mirror
26. For normal vision, what is distance of object
b) A concave mirror
from eye?
c) A convex mirror
a) 30 cm b) 25 cm c) Infinite d) 40 cm

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 132
d) Concave-parabolic mirror WAVE OPTICS
35. A virtual image larger than the object can be
obtained by 1. Which of the following cannot be explained on
a) Concave mirror b) Convex mirror
the basis of wave nature of light?
c) Plane mirror d) Concave lens
1. Polarization
36. The field of view is maximum for
2. Optical activity
a) Plane mirror b) Concave mirror
3. Photoelectric effect
c) Convex mirror d) Cylindrical mirror
4. Compton effect
37. Image formed by a convex mirror is
a) (iii) and (iv) b) (ii) and (iii)
a) Virtual b) Real
c) (i)and (iii) d) (ii) and (iv)
c) Enlarged d) Inverted
2. The wave theory of light, in its original form,
38. The bottom of a container filled with liquid
was first postulated by
appear slightly raised because of
a) Refraction b) Interference a) Issac Newton b) Christian Huygens
c) Diffraction d) Reflection c) Thomas Young d) Augustin Jean
Fresnel
3. According to Newton’s corpuscular theory,
ANSWER KEYS ( RAY OPTICS)
the speed of light is
1) b 2) c 3) a
a) Same in all the media
4) b 5) b 6) d
b) Lesser in rarer medium
7) b 8) d 9) a
c) Lesser in denser medium
10) b 11) b 12) b
d) Independent of the medium
13) b 14) a 15) d
4. In Huygen’s wave theory, the locus of all
16) a 17) a 18) c
points in the same state of vibration is called
19) d 20) b 21) d
a) A half period zone b) Oscillator
22) a 23) c 24) d
c) A wave front d) A ray
25) c 26) b 27) a
5. The wave theory of light was given by
28) a 29) c 30) b
a) Maxwell b) Planck c) Huygen d) Young
31) a 32) b 33) b
6. Which one of the following property of light
34) c 35) a 36) c
does not support wave theory of light?
37) a 38) a
a) Light obeys laws of reflection and
refraction
b) Light waves get polarized
c) Light shows photoelectric effect
d) Light shows interference
7. The theory associated with secondary
wavelets is
a) Doppler’s effect
b) Special theory of relativity
c) Huygen’s wave theory
d) None of the above
8. The wavefront of distant source of unknown
shape is approximately
a) Spherical b) Cylindrical
c) Elliptical d) Plane
9. In Young’s double slit experiment a minima is
observed when path difference between the

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 133
interfering beam is the velocity of 3 ×
a) 𝜆 b) 1.5𝜆 108 ms−1
c) 2𝜆 d) 2.25𝜆 18. The wave front due to a source situated at
10. In Young’s double slit experiment, a minimum infinity is
is obtained when the phase difference of a) Spherical
superimposing waves is b) Cylindrical
a) b) (2𝑛 c) d) (𝑛 c) Planar
Zero 𝑛𝜋
− 1)𝜋 + 1)𝜋 d) None of these
11. Colours in thin films are due to 19. A Young’s double slit experiment uses a
a) Diffraction phenomenon monochromatic source. The shape of the
b) Scattering phenomenon interference fringes formed on a screen is
c) Interference phenomenon a) Hyperbola
d) Polarization phenomenon b) Circle
12. In the phenomenon of interference, energy is c) Straight line
a) b) c) Conserv d) d) Parabola
Destroy
Created ed but it Same at 20. Two coherent sources of light can be obtained
ed at
at dark is all by
bright
fringes redistrib points a) Two different lamps
fringes
uted b) Two different lamps but of the same power
13. A very thin film that reflects white light c) Two different lamps of same power and
appears having the same colour
a) Coloured d) None of the above
b) White 21. Intensity of light depends upon
c) Black a) Velocity b) Wavelength
d) Red c) Amplitude d) Frequency
14. In the diffraction pattern of a single slit 22. By corpuscular theory of light, the
a) All b) All c) d) phenomenon which can be explained is
Central
bands bands Central a) Refraction b) Interference
band is
are are band is c) Diffraction d) Polarization
narrowe
uniforml uniforml wider 23. Soap bubble appears coloured due to the
r
y bright y wide phenomenon of
15. The diffraction effect can be observed in a) Interference b) Diffraction
a) Only sound waves c) Dispersion d) Reflection
b) Only light waves 24. Huygens wave theory allows us to know
c) Only ultrasonic waves a) The wavelength of the wave
d) Sound as well as light waves b) The velocity of the wave
16. An unpolarised beam of intensity 𝐼0 falls on a c) The amplitude of the wave
polariod. The intensity of the emergent light d) The propagation of wave fronts
is 25. Wavefront of a wave has direction with wave
a) 𝐼0 b) c) 𝐼0 d) motion
𝐼0 Zero
2 4 a) Parallel b) Perpendicular
17. The phenomenon of polarization of light c) Opposite d) At an angle of 𝜃
indicates that 26. Two waves of intensity 𝐼 undergo
a) Light is a b) Light is a transverse Interference. The maximum intensity
longitudinal wave wave obtained is
c) Light is not a wave d) Light travels with a) 𝐼/2 b) 𝐼 c) 2𝐼 d) 4𝐼

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 134
27. A wave can transmit ………. from one place to ANSWER KEYS (WAVE OPTICS)
another
a) Energy b) Amplitude 1) a 2) b 3) b
c) Wavelength d) Matter 4) c 5) c 6) c
28. The principle of superposition is basic to the 7) c 8) d 9) b
phenomenon of 10) b 11) c 12) c
a) Total internal reflection 13) a 14) d 15) d
b) Interference 16) a 17) b 18) c
c) Reflection 19) d 20) d 21) c
d) Refraction 22) a 23) a 24) d
29. Wavefront means 25) b 26) d 27) a
a) All particles in it have same phase 28) b 29) a 30) a
b) All particles have opposite phase of 31) c 32) a 33) a
vibrations
c) Few particles are in same phase, rest are in
opposite phase
d) None of these
30. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the
central point on the screen is
a) Bright
b) Dark
c) First bright and then dark
d) First dark and then bright
31. In the interference pattern, energy is
a) Created at the position of maxima
b) Destroyed at the position of minima
c) Conserved but is redistributed
d) None of the above
32. To observe diffraction the size of an obstacle
a) Should be of the same order as wavelength
b) Should be much larger than the wavelength
c) Have no relation to wavelength
d) Should be exactly 𝜆/2
33. Light waves can be polarized as they are
a) Transverse b) Of high frequency
c) Longitudinal d) Reflected

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 135
DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND metal
d) Proportional to the frequency of light
MATTER 10. In photoelectric effect, the electrons are
ejected from metals if the incident light has a
1. A particle with rest mass zero is moving speed certain minimum
c. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with it a) Wavelength b) Frequency
a) b) c) ℎ𝑣 d) 𝑚0 𝑐 c) Amplitude d) Angle of incidence
Zero Infinity
𝑐 ℎ
11. The photoelectric effect can be understood on
2. Which of the following is not the property of
the basis of
the photons?
a) The principle of superposition
a) Momentum b) Energy
b) The electromagnetic theory of light
c) Charge d) Velocity
c) The special theory of relativity
3. Four particles have same momentum. Which
d) Line spectrum of the atom
has maximum kinetic energy?
12. When intensity of incident light increases
a) Proton b) Electron
a) Photo-current increases
c) Deuteron d) 𝛼- particle
b) Photo-current decreases
4. In photoelectric effect, the KE of electrons
c) Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons
emitted from the metal surface depends upon
increases
a) Intensity of light
d) Kinetic energy of emitted photoelectrons
b) Frequency of incident light
decreases
c) Velocity of incident light
13. In photoelectric effect if the intensity of light is
d) Both intensity and velocity of light
doubled, then maximum kinetic energy of
5. Photoelectric effect can be explained by
photoelectrons will become
a) Corpusular theory of light
a) Double b) Half
b) Wave nature of light
c) Four times d) No change
c) Bohr’s theory
14. Stopping potential required to reduce the
d) Quantum theory of light
photoelectric current to zero
6. The photoelectric effect represents that
a) Is directly proportional to the wavelength of
a) Light has a particle nature
the incident radiation
b) Electron has a wave nature
b) Increases uniformly with wavelength of the
c) Proton has a wave nature
incident radiation
d) None of the above
c) Is directly proportional to the frequency of
7. The maximum kinetic energy of emitted
the incident radiation
electrons in a photoelectric effect does not
d) Decreases uniformly with the frequency of
depend upon
the incident radiation
a) Wavelength b) Frequency
15. The wavelength of de-Broglie wave associated
c) Intensity d) Work function
with a thermal neutron of mass 𝑚 at absolute
8. Which of the following event, support the
temperature 𝑇 is given by (Here, 𝑘 is the
quantum nature of light?
Boltzmann constant)
a) Diffraction b) Polarization
a) ℎ b) ℎ c) ℎ d) ℎ
c) Interference d) Photoelectric effect
√2𝑚𝑘𝑇 √𝑚𝑘𝑇 √3𝑘𝑚𝑇 2√𝑚𝑘𝑇
9. In photoelectric effect, the number of electrons
16. An electron and a proton have the same de-
ejected per second is
Broglie wavelength. Then the kinetic energy of
a) Proportional to the wavelength of light
the electron is
b) Proportional to the intensity of light
a) Zero
c) Proportional to the work function of the
b) Infinity

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 136
c) Equal to kinetic energy of the proton 𝑅ℎ𝑐 2
c) 𝐸 = 𝑚𝑐 2 d) 𝐸 = 2
d) Greater than the kinetic energy of proton 𝑛
17. Which one of the following statements 26. The magnitude of saturation photoelectric
regarding photo-emission of electrons is current depends upon
correct? a) Frequency b) Intensity
a) Kinetic energy of electrons increases with c) Work function d) Stopping potential
the intensity of incident light. 27. The mass of a photo electron is
b) Electrons are emitted when the wavelength a) 9.1 × 10−27 𝑘𝑔 b) 9.1 × 10−29 𝑘𝑔
of the incident light is above a certain c) 9.1 × 10−31 𝑘𝑔 d) 9.1 × 10−34 𝑘𝑔
threshold wavelength. 28. The work function of a metal is
c) Photoelectric emission is instantaneous with a) The energy for the electron to enter into the
the incidence of light. metal
d) Photoelectrons are emitted whenever a gas b) The energy for producing X-ray
is irradiated with ultraviolet light. c) The energy is required for an electron to
18. Electron volt is a unit of come out from metal surface
a) Potential b) Charge c) Power d) Energy d) None of these
19. Dual nature of radiation is shown by
a) Diffraction and reflection
b) Refraction and diffraction
c) Photoelectric effect alone
d) Photoelectric effect and diffraction ANSWER KEYS ( DUAL NATURE )
20. The wavelength of the matter wave is 1) a 2) c 3) b
independent of 4) b 5) d 6) a
a) Mass b) Velocity 7) c 8) d 9) b
c) Momentum d) Charge 10) b 11) d 12) a
21. Which phenomenon best supports the theory 13) d 14) c 15) c
that matter has a wave nature 16) d 17) c 18) d
a) Electron momentum b) Electron diffraction 19) d 20) d 21) b
c) Photon momentum d) Photon diffraction 22) b 23) a 24) b
22. Which is the incorrect statement of the 25) a 26) b 27) c
following 28) c
a) Photon is a particle with zero rest mass
b) Photon is a particle with zero momentum
c) Photons travel with velocity of light in
vacuum
d) Photon even feel the pull of gravity
23. If a photon has velocity 𝑐 and frequency 𝑣, then
which of following represents its wavelength
a) ℎ𝑐 b) ℎ𝑣 c) ℎ𝑣 d)
2
ℎ𝑣
𝐸 𝑐 𝑐
24. The momentum of a photon of energy ℎ𝑣 will
be
a) ℎ𝑣 b) ℎ𝑣/𝑐 c) ℎ𝑣𝑐 d) ℎ/𝑣
25. By photoelectric effect, Einstein, proved
1
a) 𝐸 = ℎ𝑣 b) 𝐾. 𝐸. = 𝑚𝑣 2
2

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 137
ATOMS c) Energy and angular momentum
d) None of the above
1. Number of neutrons in C12 and C14 are 9. When hydrogen atom is in its first excited
a) 8 and 6 b) 6 and 8 level, its radius is …… its ground state radius
c) 6 and 6 d) 8 and 8 a) Half b) Same
2. When a hydrogen atom is raised from the c) Twice d) Four times
ground state to an excited state 10. In the Bohr’s model of the hydrogen atom, the
a) P.E. increases and K.E. decreases lowest orbit corresponds to
b) P.E. decreases and K.E. increases a) Infinite energy b) Maximum energy
c) Both kinetic energy and potential energy c) Minimum energy d) Zero energy
increase 11. The kinetic energy of an electron revolving
d) Both K.E. and P.E. decrease around a nucleus will be
3. In Rutherford scattering experiment, what a) Four times of P.E. b) Double of P.E.
will be the correct angle for 𝛼 scattering for c) Equal to P.E. d) Half of its P.E.
an impact parameter b=0? 12. Bohr’s atom model assumes
a) 90° b) 270° c) 0° d) 180° a) The nucleus is of infinite mass and is at rest
4. The nucleus of an atom consists of b) Electrons in a quantized orbit will not
a) Electrons and protons radiate energy
b) Electrons, protons and neutrons c) Mass of electron remains constant
c) Electrons and Neutrons d) All the above conditions.
d) Neutrons and protons 13. In Bohr model of the hydrogen atom, the
5. To explain his theory, Bohr used lowest orbit corresponds to
a) Conservation of linear momentum a) Infinite energy b) The maximum
b) Conservation of angular momentum energy
c) Conservation of quantum frequency c) The minimum d) Zero energy
d) Conservation of energy energy
6. Rutherford’s atomic model could account for 14. For an electron in the second orbit of Bohr’s
a) Concept of stationary orbits hydrogen atom, the moment of linear
b) The positively charged control core of an momentum is
atom a) b) c) 2ℎ d) ℎ
𝑛𝜋 2𝜋ℎ
c) Origin of spectra 𝜋 𝜋
15. Which of these is non-divisible
d) Stability of atoms
a) Nucleus b) Photon c) Proton d) Atom
7. The de-Broglie wavelength of an electron in
16. The production of band spectra is caused by
the first Bohr orbit is
a) Atomic nuclei b) Hot metals
a) Equal to one fourth the circumference of
the first orbit c) Molecules d) electrons
17. According to classical theory, the circular path
b) Equal to half the circumference of the first
of an electron in Rutherford atom is
orbit
a) Spiral b) Circular
c) Equal to twice the circumference of the first
c) Parabolic d) Straight line
orbit
d) Equal to the circumference of the first orbit 18. Electrons in the atom are held to the nucleus
by
8. In Bohr’s model of hydrogen atom, which of
a) Coulomb’s forces
the following pairs of quantities are
b) Nuclear forces
quantized?
c) Van der Waals’ forces
a) Energy and linear momentum
d) Gravitational forces
b) Linear and angular momentum

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 138
19. According to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom, NUCLEI
for the electron in the 𝑛th allowed orbit the
(i) Linear momentum is proportional to 1/𝑛 1. For uranium nucleus how does its mass vary
(ii)Radius is proportional to 𝑛 with volume?
(iii)Kinetic energy is proportional to1/𝑛2 a) 𝑚 ∝ 𝑉 b) 𝑚 ∝ 1/𝑉 c) 𝑚 ∝ √𝑉 d) 𝑚 ∝ 𝑉 2
(iv) Angular momentum is proportional to 𝑛 2. The radius of nucleus is
Choose the correct option from the codes a) Proportional to its mass number
given below. b) Inversely Proportional to its mass number
a) (i),(iii),(iv) are correct c) Proportional to the cube root of its mass
b) (i) is correct number
c) (i),(ii) are correct d) Not related to its mass number
d) (iii) is correct 3. The approximate nuclear radius is proportional
20. According to Bohr’s atomic model, the to (𝐴 is the mass number and 𝑍 the atomic
relation between principal quantum number)
number(𝑛) and radius of orbit(𝑟) is a) √𝐴 b) 𝐴1/3 c) √𝑍 d) 𝑍1/3
a) b) 1 c) 1 d)
𝑟 ∝ 𝑛2 𝑟∝ 2 𝑟∝ 𝑟 ∝𝑛 4. The mass number of nucleus is
𝑛 𝑛
a) Sometimes equal to its atomic number
21. The angular momentum (L) of an electron
moving in a stable orbit around nucleus is b) Sometimes less than and sometimes more
ℎ than its atomic number
a) Half integral multiple of 2𝜋
c) Always less than its atomic number
b) integral multiple of ℎ d) Always more than its atomic number
ℎ
c) integral multiple of 2𝜋 5. Which shows radioactivity?
d) Half integral multiple of ℎ a) Protium b) Deuterium
22. When hydrogen atom is in its first excited c) Tritium d) None of these
level, its radius is how many times its ground 6. Fusion reaction takes place at high temperature
state radius? because
a) Half b) Same a) KE is high enough to overcome repulsion
c) Twice d) Four times between nuclei
b) nuclei are most stable at this temperature
c) nuclei are unstable at this temperature
d) None of the above
ANSWER KEYS(Atoms) 7. Which of the following is not conserved in
nuclear reaction?
1) b 2) a 3) d a) Total energy
4) d 5) b 6) b b) Mass number
7) d 8) c 9) d c) Charge Number
10) c 11) d 12) d d) Number of fundamental particles
13) c 14) d 15) b 8. When 92 U235 is bombarded with one neutron,
16) c 17) a 18) a fission occurs and the products are three
19) a 20) a 21) c neutrons, 𝐵𝑎36 Kr 94 , and
22) d a) 56 Ba141 b) 54 Xe139 c) 56 Ba139 d) 58 I142
9. The energy released in the explosion of an atom
bomb is mainly due to
a) nuclear fusion
b) nuclear fission

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 139
c) Controlled nuclear chain reaction ANSWER KEYS(Nuclei)
d) None of the above
10. For maintaining sustained chain reaction, the 1) a 2) c 3) b
following is required 4) a 5) c 6) a
a) Protons b) electrons c) neutrons d) positons 7) d 8) c 9) b
11. The difference between U235 and U238 atom is 10) c 11) d 12) d
that 13) c 14) a 15) c
a) U238 contains 3 more protons 16) b 17) b 18) d
b) U238 contains 3 protons and 3 more electrons 19) d
U238 contains 3 more neutrons and 3 more
c)
electrons
d) U238 contains 3 more neutrons
12. When the number of nucleons in nuclei
increase, the binding energy per nucleon
a) Increases continuously with mass number
b) Decreases continuously with mass number
c) Remains constant with mass number
d) First increases and then decreases with
increases of mass number
13. In helium nucleus, there are
a) 2 protons and 2 electrons
b) 2 neutrons, 2 protons and 2 electrons
c) 2 protons and 2 neutrons
d) 2 positrons and 2 protons
14. The rest energy of an electron is
a) 510 𝐾𝑒𝑉b) 931 𝐾𝑒𝑉 c) 510 𝑀𝑒𝑉 d) 931 𝑀𝑒𝑉
15. For effective nuclear forces, the distance should
be
a) 10−10 𝑚 b) 10−13 𝑚 c) 10−15 𝑚 d) 10−20 𝑚
16. Sun energy is due to
a) Fission of hydrogen
b) Fusion of hydrogen
c) Both fission and fusion
d) Neither fusion nor fission
17. Size of nucleus is of the order of
a) 10−10 𝑚 b) 10−15 𝑚 c) 10−12 𝑚 d) 10−19 𝑚
18. Nuclear binding energy is equivalent to
a) Mass of proton
b) Mass of neutron
c) Mass of nucleus
d) Mass defect of nucleus
19. The binding energy of nucleus is a measure of
its
a) Charge b) Mass
c) Momentum d) Stability

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 140
SEMICONDUCTORS 9. Application of a forward bias to a 𝑝-𝑛 junction
Increase the number of donors on the 𝑛-
a)
1. For an insulator the forbidden energy gap is side
a) Zero b) 1 eV c) 5 eV d) 2 eV b) Increase the electric field in the depletion
2. The energy band gap (distance between the zone
conduction band and valence band) in c) Increase the potential difference across
conductor is (the depletion zone)
a) Zero b) 4 Å c) 10 Å d) 100 Å d) Widens the depletion zone
3. When a solid with a band gap has a donor 10. In silicon when phosphorus is doped ……. is
level just below its empty energy band, the formed
solid is a) 𝑝-type semiconductor
a) An insulator b) 𝑛-type semiconductor
b) A conductor c) p-n junction
c) 𝑝-type semiconductor d) None of these
d) 𝑛-type semiconductor 11. The charge carries in a 𝑝-type semiconductor
4. The reverse saturation of 𝑝-𝑛 diode are
a) Depends on doping concentrations a) Electrons only
b) Depends on diffusion lengths of carriers b) Holes only
c) Depends on the doping concentrations and c) Holes in larger numbers and electrons in
diffusion lengths smaller numbers
d) Depends on the doping concentrations, d) Holes and electrons in equal numbers
diffusion length and device temperature 12. The 𝑛-type semiconductors are obtained,
5. Barrier potential of a p-n junction diode does when germanium is doped with
not depend on a) Arsenic b) Phosphorus
a) Forward bias b) Doping density c) Antimony d) Any one of these
c) Diode design d) Temperature 13. 𝑛-type semiconductor is
6. Within depletion region of p-njunction diode a) Positively charged
a) 𝑝-side is positive and 𝑛-side is negative b) Negatively charged
b) 𝑝-side is negative and 𝑛-side is positive c) Neutral
c) Both sides are positive or both negative d) Positive or negative depending upon
d) Both side are neutral doping material
7. An intrinsic semiconductor at 0 K 14. Doping of intrinsic semiconductor is done
temperature behaves like a) To neutralize charge carriers
a) Conductor b) To increase the concentration of majority
b) 𝑝-type semiconductor charge carriers
c) 𝑛-type semiconductor c) To make it neutral before disposal
d) Insulator d) To carry out further purification
8. Identify the property which is not 15. What is the name of the level formed due to
characteristic for a semiconductor? impurity atom in 𝑝-type in the forbidden gap?
a) At a very low temperature, it behaves like a) Donor level b) Acceptor level
an insulator c) Conduction level d) Forbidden level
b) At high temperature two types of charge 16. A 𝑝-type material is electrically …….
carriers will cause conductivity a) Positive
c) The charge carriers are electrons and holes b) Negative
in the valence band at higher temperatures c) Neutral
d) The semiconductor is electrically neutral d) Depends on the concentration of 𝑝

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

MCQ’S 141
impurities
17. If the forward voltage in a diode is increased,
the width of the depletion region
a) Increases b) Decreases
c) Fluctuates d) No change
18. When p-n junction diode is forward biased
then
a) The depletion region is reduced and barrier
height is increased
a) 𝐶 b) 𝐴, 𝐶
b) The depletion region is widened and
c) 𝐵, 𝐷 d) 𝐴, 𝐵, 𝐶, 𝐷
barrier height is reduced
25. The reason of current flow in 𝑃-𝑁 junction in
c) Both the depletion region and barrier
forward bias is
height are reduced
a) Drifting of charge carriers
d) Both the depletion region and barrier
b) Minority charge carriers
height are increased
c) Diffusion of charge carriers
19. Electric conduction in semi-conductor takes
d) All of these
place due to
26. Function of rectifier is
a) Electrons only
To convert 𝑎𝑐 into To convert 𝑑𝑐 into
b) Holes only a) b)
𝑑𝑐 𝑎𝑐
c) Both electrons and holes
c) Both (a) and (b) d) None of these
d) None of the above
27. Select the correct statement
20. The electrical circuit used to get smooth DC
a) In a full wave rectifier, two diodes work
output from a rectifier circuit is called
alternately
a) Filter b) Oscillator
b) In a full wave rectifier, two diodes work
c) Logic gates d) Amplifier
simultaneously
21. By increasing the temperature, the specific
c) The efficiency of full wave and half wave
resistance of a conductor and a
rectifiers is same
semiconductor
d) The full wave rectifier is bi-directional
a) Increases for both
b) Decreases for both
c) Increases, decreases respectively ANSWER KEYS (Semiconductors)
d) Decreases, increases respectively
22. Minority carriers in a 𝑝-type semiconductor 1) c 2) a 3) d
are 4) d 5) c 6) b
a) Free electrons 7) d 8) c 9) a
b) Holes 10) b 11) c 12) d
c) Neither holes nor free electrons 13) c 14) b 15) b
d) Both holes and free electrons 16) c 17) b 18) c
23. In depletion layer of unbiased p-n junction 19) c 20) a 21) c
a) Holes are present 22) a 23) c 24) c
b) Electrons are present 25) c 26) a 27) a
c) Only fixed ions are present
d) None of the above
24. A full wave rectifier circuit along with the
input and output are shown in the figure, the
contribution from the diode 𝐼 is (are)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 142

2. Two point charges qA = 3 C and qB = −3

II PUC - PHYSICS C are located 20 cm apart in vacuum.
CHAPTERWISE (a) What is the electric field at the midpoint
QUESTIONS O of the line AB joining the two charges?
NUMERICALS (b) If a negative test charge of
magnitude 1.5 nC is placed at this
point, what is the force experienced by
Chapter 1: Electric Charges and Fields the test charge? (Ans: E=5.4 x 106, F=
8.1 x 10-3N along AB)
1. Two point charges +15µC and -10µC are
separated by a distance 20cm in air.
Calculate the electric field at the midpoint of
the line joining two charges. If a point
charge of 20 mC is placed at that midpoint,
what is the magnitude of electric force
experienced by it? (Ans: E=2.25 x 107
NC-1, F= 4.5 x 105 N)

3. The electrostatic force on a small sphere of

charge0.4µC due to another small sphere of
charge -0.8µC in
air separated by a distance (d) is 0.2N.
(a) Find the distance between the two
spheres.
(b) What is the magnitude and nature of
force on the second sphere due to the

 first? (Ans: d = 12 cm, same force )

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 143

5. ABC is an equilateral triangle of side 0.03m.

Charges of +5nC +3nC and -5nC are placed
at the corners A,B and C respectively. Find
the resultant force on the charge placed at
B.(Ans: F=15x10-5N parallel to AC)

4. Three point charges are placed at the

following points on the x axis: 2𝜇C at
x=0, -3𝜇C at x=40cm and -5𝜇C at
x=120cm. Calculate the force on the -
3𝜇C charge. (Ans:F= 0.548 N towards
left)

6. Three point charges OF +5nC, +20nC

and +5nC are placed at the corners A, B
& C of a square ABCD having side 0.8m.
Calculate magnitude of electric field at
the corner D.( Ans: E=240 N/C along
BD)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 144

8. Find the point on the line joining the two

charges +12nC and +3nC where the
resultant field is zero. Distance between
the charges is 1.2m.(Ans: x=0.8m
from bigger charge)

7. Charges of -20nC, +20nC and +40nC

are placed at the corners A, B & D of a
square of side 2m. Calculate the
resultant field at the centre of the
square.(Ans: E=127 N/C parallel to
DA)

9. Two identical metal spheres having equal

and similar charges repel each other
with a force of 103 N when they are
placed 10cm apart in a medium of
dielectric constant 5. Determine the
charge on each sphere.( Ans: q=75 x
10-6C)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 145

10. The electrostatic force of repulsion Chapter 2: Electrostatic Potential

between two positively charged ions and Capacitance
carrying equal charge is 3.7 x 10-9N, 1. Two charges 30nC and -20nC are located
when they are separated by a a distance 15 cm apart. At what points on the line
of 5A0. How many electrons are missing joining the two charges is the electric
from each ion? (Ans: n=2 electrons) potential zero? Take the potential at
infinity to be zero. (Ans: x=6cm, 30cm
from smaller charge)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 146

2. Two point charges +1 nC and 4 nC are 3. Charges 2C, 4C and 6C are placed at
1m apart in air. Find the positions along the three corners A, B and C of a square
the line joining the two charges at which ABCD of side x metre. Find what charge
resultant potential is zero. (Ans: must be placed at the fourth corner so
x=0.2m, 0.33m from smaller charge) that net potential at the centre of the
square becomes zero. (Ans: q=-12𝝁C )

4. ABCD is a square of side 2m. Point charges

of 5nC, 10nC and -5nC are placed at
corners A, B, C respectively. Calculate the
work done in transferring a charge of 5C
from D to the point of intersection of
diagonals. (Ans: W=159µJ)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 147

6. In a parallel plate capacitor with air

between the plates, each plate has an area
of 8 × 10−3 m2 and the distance between
the plates is 2 mm. Calculate the
capacitance of the capacitor. If this
capacitor is connected to a 50 V supply,
what is the charge on each plate of the
capacitor? (Absolute permittivity of free
space = 8.85  10-12 Fm-1) (Ans:
C=35.4pF, q=1770pC)

5. In a parallel plate capacitor with air

between the plates, each plate has an area
of 6 × 10−3 m2 and the distance between
the plates is 3 mm. Calculate the
capacitance of the capacitor. If this
capacitor is connected to a 100 V supply,
what is the charge on each plate of the
capacitor? (Ans: c=17.7 pF, q=1.77nC)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 148

7. When the two capacitors are connected in

series and connected across 4kV line, the
Energy stored in a system 8J. T he same
capacitor is connected in parallel across
the same line, energy stored is 36J.Find
the capacitance of the capacitors. (Ans:
C1=3𝝁F, C2=1.5𝝁F)

9. A capacitor has capacitance of 10𝜇F and is

charged to a potential 200V. A second
capacitor has a capacitance 20𝜇F and is
charged to a potential of 300V. If, after
charging, the two capacitors are connected
in parallel. How much energy is
dissipated? (Ans:E1=1.1J, E2=1.06J
∆E = 0.033 J)

8. Two capacitors of capacitance 600pF &

900pF are connected in series across a
200V supply. Calculate (i) the effective
capacitance of the combination, (ii)the pd
across each capacitor and (iii) the total
charge stored in the system.(Ans:
Cs=360pF, V1=120V, V2=80V,
q=0.072𝝁C)
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
NUMERICALS 149

Chapter 3: Electric Current

1. A battery of internal resistance 3 is

connected to 20 resistor and potential
difference across the resistor is 10V. If
another resistor of 30  is connected in
series with the first resistor and battery is
again connected to the combination,
calculate the emf and terminal p.d across
the combination. (Ans: E=11.5V,
pd=10.84V)

3. Two identical cells either in series or in

parallel combination, gives the same
current of 0.5A through external resistance
of 4. Find the emf and internal resistance
of each cell. (Ans: E=3V, r=4Ω)

2. A wire of length 2m, diameter 1mm and

resistivity 1.963 × 10-6 m is connected in
series with a battery of emf 3V and
internal resistance 1. Calculate the
resistance of the wire and the current in
the circuit. (Ans: R =5Ω, I=0.5A)
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
NUMERICALS 150

5. The number density of free electrons in a

copper conductor is 8.5 x 1028 m-3. How
long does an electron take to drift from
one end of a wire 3.0m long to its other
end? The area of cross section of the
wire is 2.0 x 10-6 m2 and it is carrying a
current of 3.0A.( Ans: vd=0.00011
m/s, t=27200 s)

4. Two cells of emf 2V and 4V and internal

resistance 1  and 2 respectively are
connected in parallel so as to send the
current in the same direction through an
external resistance of 10. Find the
potential difference across 10  resistor.
(Ans: I = 0.25A, V=2.5V)

6. The number density of free

electrons in a copper conductor is 8.0 x
1028 m-3. The area of cross section of the
wire is 1.5 x 10-6 m2 and it is carrying a
current of 2.0A. Find the drift velocity of
the electrons and current density.
( Ans: vd= 0.104 x 10-3 m/s, J =
1.33 x 106 Am-2)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 151

7. At room temperature (27.0 °C) the

resistance of a heating element is 100 .
What is the temperature of the element if
the resistance is found to be 117 , given
that the temperature coefficient of the
material of the resistor is 1.70 × 10–4
°C–1. ( Ans: T = 1027 0C)

8. In the given wheatstone's network,

calculate the value of electric current
flowing through the galvanometer. (Ans:
𝟐
Ig = - A)
𝟒𝟗

9. Resistances in cyclic order in a

Whetstone’s network are 2Ω, 3 Ω, 1 Ω
and 2 Ω. Resistance of the galvanometer
is 10 Ω. Emf of the cell is 1.2V and its
internal resistance is negligible. What is
the current through the
galvanometer?(Ig=0.026A)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 152

Chapter 4: Moving Charges and

Magnetism

1. In a chamber, a uniform magnetic field of

6.5 x 10-4 T is maintained. An electron is
shot into the field with a speed of 4.8 x
106 m/s normal to the field. Determine the
radius of the circular orbit described by the
electron. Also calculate the period,
frequency and angular velocity of the
electron.( Ans: r=4.2cm, T=5.5 x 10-8s,
𝝎=1.14 rad/sec)

2. A circular coil of 20 turns of mean radius

0.06m carries a current of 1A. Calculate
the magnetic field at (i) the centre of the
coil (ii) a point on the axis distant 0.08m
from its centre. Given 𝜇0=4𝜋 x 10-7 Tm/A.
( Ans: Bcentre= 0.209 mT,
Baxis=0.042mT)
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
NUMERICALS 153

4. Three straight wires A,B and C are in same

plain. B is between A & C such that
AB=2cm & AC =8cm. Currents in A, B & C
are 1A, 1.5A & 2A in the same direction.
Calculate the resultant force per unit
length on B. Also find the net force on C if
the current through it is reversed?( Ans:
FB=0.5 x 10-5 N/m towards A, Fc= 1.5
x 10-5 N/m away from C)

3. Two identical circular coils are placed

concentrically with their planes
perpendicular to each other. A current of
2A passes through each coil of 50 turns. If
the radius of either coil is 0.3m, find the
resultant magnetic field at their common
centre. (Ans: 0.29 mT).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 154

Chapter 6: Electromagnetic Induction

1. Current in a coil falls from 2.5A to 2.0A in

0.01 s, calculate the induced emf in a coil
if its self inductance is 5mH. (Ans:
e=0.25V)

5. A galvanometer having coil of resistance

12 gives full scale deflection for a
current of 4mA. (i) How can it be 2. A square loop of side 10cm and resistance
converted into a voltmeter of range 0- 0.5Ω is placed vertically in the east-west
24V? (Ans: R=5988 Ω) plane. A uniform magnetic field of 0.1T is
(ii) How can it be converted into a setup across the plane in the north-east
ammeter of range 0 -5A? (Ans: direction. The magnetic field is decreased to
S=0.0096Ω) zero in 0.7s at a steady rate. Determine the
magnitudes of induced emf and current
during this time interval.( Ans: e=0.001V,
I=0.002A)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 155

3. A circular coil of radius 10cm and 25turns is

rotated about its vertical diameter with an
angular speed of 40 rads-1 in a uniform
horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 5 x
10-2T. Calculate the emf induced in the coil.
Also find the current in the coil if the
resistance of the coil is 15Ω.( Ans:
e=1.57V, I=0.11).

5. A long solenoid with 15 turns per cm has a

small loop of area 2.0cm2 placed inside the
solenoid normal to its axis. If the current
carried by the solenoid changes steadily
from 2.0A to 4.0A in 0.1s, what is the
induced emf in the loop while the current is
changing?( Ans: e=7.5𝝁V)

4. A conductor of length 3m moving in a

uniform magnetic field of strength 100T. It
covers a distance of 70m in 5sec. Its plane
of motion makes an angle 0f 300 with the
direction of magnetic field. Calculate the
emf induced in it.( Ans: e=2100V).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 156

Chapter 7: Alternating Current

1. A pure inductor of 25.0 mH is connected to

a source of 220 V & 50Hz. Find the
inductive reactance and rms current and
peak current in the circuit (Ans:
XL=7.85Ω, Irms=39.6A).

3. A sinusoidal voltage of 250 V and

frequency 50Hz is applied to a series LCR
circuit. In which, R = 6 Ω, L = 25 mH and
C = 796 µF. Calculate
a) the impedance of the circuit and
b) the power factor. (Ans: XL=7.85Ω,
XC=4Ω, Z=7.13Ω, cos𝝓=0.8415)

2. An inductor and bulb are connected in

series to an AC source of 220V, 50 Hz ac
source. A current of 11A flows in the
circuit and phase angle between voltage
and current is /4 radian. Calculate the
impedance and inductance of the circuit.
(Ans: Z=20Ω, L=0.045H)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 157

4. A sinusoidal voltage of rms value 10 V and

frequency 50Hz is applied to a series LCR
circuit. In which, R = 3 Ω, L = 12.75 mH
Find
a) the impedance of the circuit
b) rms current.
c) Phase difference between current and
voltage(Ans: XL= 4 Ω, Z = 5 Ω, Irms
=2A, φ =530)

6. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 285 V

is applied to a series LCR circuit in which
R = 5, L =28.5 mH, and C = 800 F.
Find (a) resonant frequency (b) Calculate
the impedance, current and power
dissipated at resonance. (Ans:
fr=33.32Hz, Z=5Ω, Irms=40.3A,
5. A sinusoidal voltage of peak value 238 V P=8.1kW)
and frequency 50 Hz is applied to a series
LCR circuit in which R = 3, L = 25.48 mH,
and C = 786 F. Find (a) the impendence
of the circuit; (b) the phase difference
between the voltage across the source and
the current (c) the power factor (d)
Average power dissipated in the circuit.
(Ans: XL=8Ω, XC=4Ω, Z=5Ω, 𝝓=53.30,
cos𝝓=0.6)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 158

8. A source of alternating emf of 220V, 50 Hz

is connected in series with a resistance of
200, inductance of 100mH and
capacitance of 30F. Does the current lead
or lag the voltage and by what angle?
(Ans: XL=31.42Ω, XC=106.1Ω,
𝝓=20.50).

7. A resistor 100, a pure inductance coil of L

= 0.5 H and capacitor are in series in a
circuit containing an ac of 200V, 50 Hz. In
the circuit current is ahead of the voltage
by 30o. Find the value of the capacitance.
(Ans: C=14.82𝝁F)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 159

Chapter 9: Ray Optics and Optical

Instruments

1. Two convex lenses of focal lengths 0.20 m

and 0.30 m are kept in contact. Find the
focal lengthof the combination. Calculate
powers of two lenses and combination.
(Ans: f=0.12m, P=8.33D)

3. The angle of a prism of RI 1.6 is 600. A ray

of light incident on one face just emerges
from the other face. Calculate the angle of
incidence at the first face.( Ans:
i=35.450)

2. An equilateral prism produces a minimum

deviation of 40o. What is the R.I of the
material of theprism? Calculate the angle
of incidence. (Ans: n=1.532, i=500).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 160

4. Calculate the angle of minimum deviation

produced by prism of angle 600 and
refractive index 1.5.( Ans: D=37.20)

6. A convex lens has focal length of 0.1m in

air. Calculate its power. If the lens is
completely immersed in water, what will
be the change in the power of the lens?
Given ng=3/2, nw=4/3. (Ans: P=10D,
fw=0.4m, Pw=2.5D, 𝚫P=7.5D)

5. An equiconvex lens of glass of RI 1.5 is

immersed in a liquid of RI 1.6. If the
radius of curvature of each surface is
0.1m, find the nature and focal length of
the lens.( Ans: f=-0.8m)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 161

45. Double convex lenses are to be 7. A small bulb (a point source) is placed at
manufactured from a glass of RI 1.52, the bottom of a tank containing water to a
depth of 80 cm. What is the radius of the
with both faces of same radius of
circular surface of water through which
curvature. What is the radius of light emerge out? Refractive index of
curvature required if the focal length is water is 1 .33. ( Ans: C=48.750,
to be 25 cm? What will be the new focal r=0.91m).
length, when the lens is immersed in
water of RI 1.33? (Ans: R = 26cm, f’
=91cm)

8. A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a

tank containing water to a depth of 1m.
Find the critical angle for water air
interface. Also calculate the radius,
diameter and area of the circular bright
patch of light formed on the surface of
water? Given nw=4/3.( Ans: C=48.60,
r=1.13m, A=4.04m2).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 162

9. An object is placed in air at a distance of

20cm from a convex surface of a medium
of RI 1.6, If a virtual image is formed at a
distance of 50cm from the surface, find
the radius of curvature of the surface.
( Ans: R=33.33cm)

10. A beam of light converges at a point P.

Now a lens is placed in the path of the
convergent beam 12cm from P. at what
point does the beam converge if the lens is
(a) A convex lens of focal length 20cm,
and
(b) A concave lens of focal length 16cm?
( Ans: v=+7.5cm, v’=+48cm)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 163

Chapter 10: Wave optics

1. A beam of light consisting of two

wavelengths 420 nm and 560 nm is used
to obtain interference fringes in Young’s
double slit experiment. The distance
between the slits is 0.3 mm and the
distance between the slits and the screen
is 1.5 m. Compute the least distance of
the point from the central maximum,
where the bright fringes due to both the
wavelengths coincide. (Ans: x=8.4mm)

3. In YDSE the slits are separated by

0.28mm and screen is place at a distance
of 1.4m away from the slits. The distance
between the central bright fringe and the
fifth dark fringe is measured to be 1.35cm.
Calculate the wavelength of light used..
(Ans: 𝝀=6000A0)

2. In Young’s double slit experiment distance

between the slits is 0.5 mm. When the
screen is kept at a distance of 100 cm from
the slits the distance of 9th bright fringe
from the central fringe system is 8.835
mm. Find the wavelength of light used.
(Ans: 𝝀=4908A0)
PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS
NUMERICALS 164

Chapter 11: Dual Nature of Radiation

and Matter

1. The work function of cesium metal is 2.14

eV. When light of frequency 6 × 1014Hz is
incident on the metal surface,
photoemission of electrons occurs. What is
the (a) energy of the incident photons (b)
maximum kinetic energy of the emitted
4. In Young’s double-slit experiment using electrons? (c) Stopping potential and (d)
monochromatic light of wavelength λ, the maximum speed of the emitted
intensity of light at a point on the screen photoelectrons? Given h = 6.63  10-34 Js,
where path difference is λ, is K units. e = 1.6 x 10-19 C, me= 9.1 × 10-31kg (Ans:
What is the intensity of light at a point E=2.48eV, KEmax=0.346eV)
where path difference is λ/3? (Ans: K/4)

2. A photon of wavelength 540nm is incident

on a metal of threshold wavelength
600nm. Calculate (i) Maximum KE of
photon (ii) Stopping potential and (iii)
Maximum velocity of photo electrons.
Given:me = 9.1 x 10-31 kg, h = 6.63 x 10-
34
Js, c= 3 x 108m/s.( Ans: 0.368 x 10-
19
J, Vs=0.23V, vmax=0.28 x 106m/s).

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 165

4. The wavelength of light from the spectral

emission line of sodium is 589nm. Find the
KE at which (a) an electron, and (b) a
neutron, would have the same de Broglie
wavelength. (Ans: a. KE=4.34 𝝁eV, b.
0.236neV)

3. The work function of Cesium is 2.14eV.

Find threshold frequency for Cesium and
wavelength of incident light if the photo
current is brought to zero by a stopping
potential of 0.6V.(Ans: 𝝂0=0.5164 x
1015Hz, 𝝀=4536A0)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 166

Chapter 12: Atoms

1. The radius of the innermost electron orbit of

a hydrogen atom is 5.3×10–11 m. What are
the radii of the n = 2 and n =3 orbits?.
( Ans:2.12 A0, 4.77 A0).

5. What is the (a) momentum, (b) speed,

and (c) de Broglie wavelength of an
electron with kinetic energy of 120eV.
( Ans: p=5.91 x 10-24kg m/s, v=6.5 x
106 m/s, 𝝀=0.112nm)

2. A hydrogen atom initially in the ground

level absorbs a photon, which excites it to
the n=4 level. Determine the wavelength
anf frequency of photon.(Ans:
𝝀=97.44nm)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 167

Chapter 13: Nuclei

1. Calculate the mass defect and specific

binding energy of 7N14, given that the rest
mass of nitrogen nucleus is 14.00307 u,
mP = 1.00783 u and mn = 1.00867 u.
(Ans: 𝚫m=0.11243 u, SBE=7.48 MeV)

3. Calculate the energy released in joules by

0.5mg mass of U-235 in the following
reaction.
[1eV=1.6 x 10-19J)
92U + 0n1 ---- 56Ba141 + 36Kr92 + 30n1 +
235

Energy
Given: Rest mass of U235 = 235.044 u
Rest mass of Ba141 = 140.918 u
Rest mass of Kr92 = 91.885 u
Rest mass of 0n1 = 1.009 u
Mass of fissile material = 0.5mg = 0.5 x
10-3g(Ans: E=4.25 x 107J)

2. Calculate binding energy and binding

energy per nucleon of an oxygen nucleus
8O . Rest mass of oxygen nucleus is
16

15.995 u, mass of proton = 1.007825 u

and mass of neutron = 1.008665u. (Ans:
BE=127.54 MeV, SBE=7.97 MeV)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

NUMERICALS 168

4. (a) Two stable isotopes of lithium 3Li6 and

3Li have respective abundances of 7.5%
7

and 92.5%. These isotope have masses

6.01512 u and 7.01600 u, respectively.
Find the atomic mass of lithium. (b) Boron
has two stable isotopes, 5B10 and 5B11.
Their respective masses are 10.01294 u
and 11.00931 u, and the atomic mass of
boron is 10.811 u. Find the abundances of
5B and 5B11.( Ans: (a) 6.941u (b)
10

19.9% and 80.1%)

PREPARED BY: VISHWANATHA REDDY G VR MATERIALS

 Frequently asked important questions 169

MOST FREQUENTLY ASKED IMPORTANT QUESTIONS:

CHAPTER – 1: ELECTRICAL CHARGES AND FIELDS

2 & 3 Marks
1. State and explain Coulomb's Law. Give the vector form of Coulomb's Law.
2. Give any three properties of electric charge.
3. Give any three properties of electric field lines.
4. Define electric flux. When will be the flux is (i) maximum (ii) minimum through a surface?
5. Define electric dipole moment. Give its SI unit and direction.
6. Derive the expression for torque on an electric dipole placed in a uniform external electric field.
7. Sketch the electric field lines for a (a) negative point charge [Q< 0] (b) positive point charge [Q> 0] (c)
dipole.
8. Define the following and give their SI units
(a) Linear charge density (ii) Surface charge density (iii) Volume charge density.
9. State & explain Gauss’s law in electrostatics.
5 Marks
10.Derive the expression of electric field due to a dipole at any point on its axis.
11.Derive the expression of electric field due to a dipole at any point on its equatorial plane.
12.Using Gauss’s law in electrostatics, obtain the expression for electric field due to infinitely long straight
charged wire.
13. Using Gauss’s law, obtain the expression for electric field due to an infinitely large charged plane sheet.
14.Using Gauss’s law in electrostatics, obtain the expression for electric field due toa uniformly charged thin
spherical shell at a point. (i) Outside the shell and (ii) Inside the shell

CHAPTER – 2: ELECTROSTATIC POTENTIAL AND CAPACITANCE

2 & 3 Marks
15.Derive the relation between electric field and electric potential. OR Derive/Obtain: E = – dV/dx
16. Derive the expression for potential energy of a system of two charges in the absence of external electric field.
17.Define equipotential surface. Give an example.
18.Mention the three properties of equipotential surface.
19. What are polar and non-polar molecules? Give one example for each.
20. Mention the expression for energy stored in a capacitor and explain the terms.
21. Name the three factors on which capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor depends.

5 Marks
22. Define electrostatic potential. Derive the expression for electric potential due to an isolated point charge.
23. Obtain the expression for effective capacitance of two capacitors when connected in (a) series (b) parallel.
24. Derive the expression for the capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as the medium between its
plates.

CHAPTER – 3: CURRENT ELECTRICITY

2 & 3 Marks
25. Derive the relation 𝐉 = 𝜎𝐄 where terms have usual meaning.
 Frequently asked important questions 170
27. Define mobility. Give its SI unit.
28. Derive the relation between current and drift velocity
29. State and explain Ohm’s law.
30. Write three limitations of Ohm’s law.
31.Mention 2 factors on which resistance of a conductor depends.
32.Show the variation of resistivity of (i) conductors (ii) semiconductors (iii) nichrome with temperature
graphically.
33. State Kirchhoff’s laws/rules.
34.What is the principle/significance of Kirchhoff’s (i) node/junction rule (ii) loop rule?

5 Marks
35.Derive an expression for conductivity of a material in terms of relaxation time
36.Derive an expression for equivalent internal resistance and equivalent emf of 2 cells in series combination.
37.Derive an expression for equivalent internal resistance and equivalent emf of 2 cells in parallel combination
38.Derive an expression for the balancing condition of Whetstone’s bridge.

CHAPTER – 4: MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM

2 & 3 Marks
39.Mention the expression for magnetic force on a current carrying conductor and explain the terms.
40. What is Lorentz force? Write the expression for Lorentz force.
41.Mention the expression for magnetic force acting on a moving charge & when it will be the maximum
& minimum in a magnetic field?
42.Derive the expressions for (i) radius (ii) angular frequency and (iii) time period of revolution of charged particle
moving perpendicular to the the magnetic field.
43. State and explain Biot-savart’s law.
44. State & explain Ampere’s circuital law.
45. Using Ampere’s circuital law, derive an expression for magnetic field at a point due to a long straight wire
carrying current.
46. What is a solenoid? Mention the expression for magnetic field at a point inside the solenoid.
47. Define current sensitivity and voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer.
48.How can a moving coil galvanometer be converted into voltmeter? Explain with a diagram and expression.
49. How can a moving coil galvanometer be converted into ammeter? Explain with a diagram and expression.

5 Marks
50. Derive an expression for the magnetic field at any point on the axis of a circular current loop.
51.Derive the expression for force per unit length between two straight parallel current carrying conductors
of infinite length. Hence define “ampere”.

CHAPTER – 5 : MAGNETISM AND MATTER

2 & 3 Marks
52. State and explain Gauss’s Law in magnetism.
53. Mention any three properties of magnetic field lines.
54. Define (i) Magnetisation (ii) Magnetic intensity (iii) Magnetic permeability (iv) Magnetic susceptibility
and give their SI unit.
55. Write any three differences of (a) Diamagnetic materials (b) Paramagnetic materials (c) Ferromagnetic
 Frequently asked important questions 171
materials.
CHAPTER – 6: ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION
2 & 3 Marks
56.Describe the magnet and coil experiment to demonstrate the phenomenon of electromagnetic induction.
57.Briefly explain coil-coil experiment on electromagnetic induction.
58. State and explain Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
59.State Lenz’s law in electromagnetic induction. What is the significance of Lenz’s law?
60. What is motional emf? Obtain an expression for it.
61.Mention any two factors on which (a) self-inductance of a coil depends (b) mutual inductance of a coil
depend.
62. Obtain the expression for energy stored in inductor/solenoid.
63. What is AC generator? State the principle of AC Generator.
64. With the help of a labelled diagram, derive an expression for instantaneous current induced emf in an AC
generator.
CHAPTER – 7: ALTERNATING CURRENT
2 & 3 Marks
65.Write the relation connected to rms value and peak value of alternating current.
66.
67. Define resonance and resonant frequency in a series LCR-circuit. Obtain the expression for the resonant
frequency.
68. (a) What is a transformer? (b) State the principle of transformer.
69. Mention three sources of power loss in a transformer.
70. Explain the construction and working of a transformer with a labeled diagram.

5 Marks
71.Show that voltage leads current by π/2 when A.C. voltage applied to pure inductance.
72.Show that current leads voltage by π/2 when A.C. voltage applied to capacitor.
73. With the help of Phasor diagram, derive the expressions for the impedance and current in a series LCR
circuit, when an ac voltage is applied to it.

CHAPTER – 8: ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES

2 & 3 Marks
74. (a) What is displacement current? Give the expression for it. (b) Mention the need for displacement current.
75. Write the expression for Ampere-Maxwell’s law. Explain the terms.
76. (a) What is the source of electromagnetic waves?(b) What is the nature of electromagnetic waves?
77. Mention any three properties of electromagnetic waves.
78.Mention the expression for speed of light (a) in vacuum (b) in a medium. Explain the symbols.
79.Give the wavelength range of (a) Microwaves (b) Infra-red waves (c) Ultraviolet radiations (d) X-rays (e)
gamma rays
80.Give any two applications/uses of (a) Microwaves (b) Infra-red waves (c) Ultraviolet radiations (d) X-rays (e)
gamma rays.

CHAPTER – 9 : RAY OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS

2 & 3 Marks
81.Write the Cartesian sign conventions used in the mirrors.
 Frequently asked important questions 172
82.Derive f = R/2 for a concave mirror.
83.State and explain Snell’s law of refraction. And mention its limitation.
84.(a) Define critical angle. (b) What is total internal reflection? Mention the Conditions for total internal
reflection.
85.(a) Mention two applications of total internal reflection. (b) Write the principle
and two uses of optical fibers.
99.Draw a neat-labelled ray diagram (with arrow marks) of a simple microscope for the image
formation and write the expression for its magnification when the image is at near point.
100. Draw a neat labelled ray diagram (with arrow marks) of a compound microscope for the image
formation andwrite the expression for its magnification when the image is at near point.

5 Marks
99. Obtain the relation between n, u, v and R for spherical surface.
100. Derive Lens-maker’s formula.
101. Derive the expression for effective focal length of two thin lenses kept in contact.
102. Define the power of a lens. How does power of a lens related to its focal length?
101. Obtain an expression for the refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of the angle of the
prism andangle of minimum deviation.

CHAPTER – 10: WAVE OPTICS

2 & 3 Marks
102. Define wavefront. What type of wavefront obtained from (i) a point source (ii) a line source (iii) a star?
103. State and explain Huygens’s principle.
104. Derive Snell’s law of refraction using Huygens’s principle.
105. Show that angle of reflection is equal to angle of incidence using Huygens’s principle when a
plane wave incident on a plane mirror.
106. Give the theory of interference. Hence write the conditions for constructive interference and
destructive interference in terms of (i) phase difference and (i) path difference.
107. What is diffraction of light? Give conditions for minima and maxima in diffraction.
108. What are Polaroid’s? Mention any 3 uses of it.
109. State and explain Malus Law.

CHAPTER – 11 : DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER

2 & 3 Marks
110. Define (i) Work function of a metal (ii) electron volt (eV) (iii) Threshold frequency and (iv) Stopping potential.
111. Mention three types of electron emission.
112. Write five experimental observations of photoelectric effect.
113. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation and explain the terms.
114. Give Einstein’s explanation on photoelectric effect.
115. Mention any three characteristic properties of photon/particle nature of light.
116. What are matter waves? Write the de-Broglie relation for de-Broglie wavelength.

CHAPTER – 12 : ATOMS
2 & 3 Marks
117. State the postulates of Bohr’s atom model.
 Frequently asked important questions 173
118. Mention two limitations of Bohr atom model.
119. Mention the expression for radius of electron in nth stationary orbit
of hydrogen atom. Hence write the expression for Bohr radius.
120. Assuming the expression for the radius of electron orbit, obtain the expression for the total energy of the
electron in the stationary orbit of hydrogen atom.
121. Give de Broglie’s explanation for Bohr’s second postulate of quantization
CHAPTER – 13: NUCLEI
2 & 3 Marks
122. Define isotopes/isobars/isotones. Give examples to each.
123. Mention three characteristics/properties of nucleus.
124. Define mass defect, binding energy of a nucleus. Mention the expression of Binding energy.
125. What is nuclear force? Mention any four characteristics/properties of nuclear force.
126. Give three differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
CHAPTER – 14 : SEMICONDUCTOR ELECTRONICS
2 & 3 Marks
127. Classify the conductors, semiconductors and insulators on the basis of energy bands (band theory of solids).
128. Give three differences between n-type and p-type semiconductors
129. Give three differences between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

5 Marks
130. What is a rectifier? Describe the working of a p-n junction diode as a half wave rectifier with the help of
a circuit diagram. Draw input and output waveforms.
131. What is full wave rectifier? Describe the working of a p-n junction diode as a as a full wave rectifier, with
the help of a circuit diagram. Draw input and output waveforms.
 II PUC PHYSICS(33) BLUEPRINT FOR THE MODEL QUESTION PAPER - 2023-24
QP Question type Number of questions Marks alloted Number of questions to Marks alloted
Part to be set be answered
MCQ 15 15 15 15
A
Fill in the blank(FIB) 05 05 05 05
B SA ( 2 Marks) 09 18 05 10
C SA ( 3 Marks) 09 27 05 15
LA ( 5 Marks) 06 30 03 15
D
Numerical Problem(NP) ( 5 Marks) 04 20 02 10
Total 48 115 30 70

Remember(41 marks) Understand(33 marks) Apply(23 marks) HOTS(18 marks)

LA
Sr. Chapter/ Content domain/ No. of MCQ FIB SA SA SA NP SA SA NP LA NP MCQ NP
Unit Marks 5
No Unit/ Theme periods 1 1 LA 5 5 1 SA 5
2 3 2 2 3 mark 2 3
mark Mark mark mark mark mark
Marks Marks Marks Marks Marks Marks Marks
I 1 Electric charges & Fields 12 11 1 1 1 1
Electrostatic potential and
II 2 12 11 1 1 1 1
Capacitance
III 3 Current electricity 15 14 1 1 1 1
Moving Charges and
IV 4 13 12 1 1 1 1 1
Magnetism
5 Magnetism and Matter 6 6 1 1 1
V
6 Electromagnetic Induction 8 8 2 1 1 1
7 Alternating Current 8 8 1 1 1
VI
8 Electromagnetic Waves 3 3 1 1
Ray Optics and Optical
VII 9 11 11 1 1 1 1
Instruments
VIII 10 Wave Optics 8 7 1 1 1(ST)
Dual nature of Radiation
11 6 6 1(ST) 1
IX and Matter
12 Atoms 4 4 1 1
13 Nuclei 5 5 1 1 1
X
14 Semiconductor Electronics 9 9 1 1 1 1
Total 120 115 12 5 12 12 - 4 2 12 15 - 3 15 5 3 - 15

ST => SPLIT TYPE QUESTION (1+2+2) OR (2+3) OR (1+4) OR (1+1+3)

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 2023-24
II PUC - PHYSICS (33)
Time: 3 hours 15 min. Max Marks: 70
General Instructions:
1. All parts are compulsory.
2. For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks.
3. Answers without relevant diagram / figure / circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks.
4. Direct answers to numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks.

PART – A
I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15
1. A glass rod is rubbed with silk cloth. The charge acquired by glass rod is __________ .
(A) negative (B) positive
(C) zero (D) positive on one end and negative on the opposite end
2. A spherical conductor of radius R is carrying a charge of +Q. The ratio of the electric potentials
R
corresponding to a point on the surface of the conductor and a point at a distance from the
2
centre of the conductor are in the ratio
(A) 1: 2 (B) 2: 1 (C) 1:1 (D) 4:1
3. The resistivity of a metallic conductor ______________ with decrease in temperature.
(A) increases (B) decreases
(C) first increases and then decreases (D) first decreases and then increases
4. The Lorentz force is the force on a charged particle moving in a region containing _____________ .
(A) only electric field (B) only magnetic field
(C) both electric and magnetic fields (D) only crossed electric and magnetic fields
5. Below are the two statements related to magnetic field lines:
Statement-I : The magnetic field lines do not intersect.
Statement-II: The direction of magnetic field at a point is unique.
(A) Both the statements I and II are correct and II is the correct explanation for I
(B) Both the statements I and II are correct and II is not the correct explanation for I
(C) Statement I is wrong but the statement II is correct
(D) Statement I is correct but the statement II is wrong
6. A straight conductor of length ‘l’ is moving with a velocity ‘v’ in the direction of uniform magnetic
field of strength ‘B’. The magnitude of emf induced between the ends of the conductor is
Blv
(A) Blv (B) (C) 0 (D) 2Blv
2
II PU PHYSICS MODEL PAPER 23-24 Page 1
7. The SI unit of magnetic flux is:
-1 -2 -2
(A) Wb m (B) T m (C) weber (D) Wb m

8. The average power dissipated in an ac circuit is maximum if the ac source is connected :

(A) only to pure resistor (B) only to pure inductor
(C) only to pure capacitor (D) to a series combination of capacitor and inductor
9. The electromagnetic waves with lowest frequency among the following are :
(A) gamma rays (B) UV rays (C) microwaves (D) radio waves
10. A ray of light coming from an object which is incident parallel to the principal axis of a convex
lens placed in air after refraction __________.
(A) appears to diverge from first principal focus (B) emerges without any deviation
(C) appears to diverge from second principal focus (D) passes through second principal focus
11. If unpolarised light of intensity ‘I0’ is passed through a polaroid, the intensity of emergent light is
I0 2I 0 I0 I0
(A) (B) (C) (D)
4 3 3 2
12. The following are the statements related to photo emission:
(i) Photoelectric current is independent of intensity of incident radiation.
(ii) Stopping potential is different for different photosensitive metal surfaces for a radiation of
particular frequency (ν > νo).
(iii) Maximum speed of photoelectrons is independent of frequency of incident radiation.
(iv) Saturation current is different for radiations of different intensities having same frequency.
(A) Only (i) and (iii) are correct (B) Only (i) and (ii) are correct
(C) Only (iii) and (iv) are correct (D) Only (ii) and (iv) are correct
13. The minimum energy required to free the electron from the ground state of a hydrogen atom is
(A) 0.85 eV (B) 3.4 eV (C) 13.6 eV (D) 1.51 eV
14. The radioactive decay in which a helium nucleus is emitted is called __________.
(A) gamma decay (B) alpha decay (C) negative β decay (D) positive β decay
15. In the figure, EV and EC are the valence band and conduction
band corresponding to an extrinsic semiconductor. E is the energy
state corresponding to the impurity present in it. The impurity
present in it can be
(A) arsenic .
(B) indium
(C) phosphorous
(D) antimony

II PU PHYSICS MODEL PAPER 23-24 Page 2

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the bracket for ALL
the following questions: 5×1=5

( maximum, decrease, thermonuclear fusion, generator, increase, cell)

16. A convenient way to increase the current sensitivity of a galvanometer is to __________ the number of
turns of the coil.
17. The device used to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy is called a _______________.
18. If two waves coming from two coherent sources superpose at a point in phase, then the intensity of
light at that point is ___________ .
19. The source of energy output in the interior of stars is _______________________.
20. The width of depletion region of a pn-junction diode will_____________ on increasing the forward bias
voltage.

PART – B
III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions: 5 × 2 = 10
21. Mention any two basic properties of electric charges.
22. The amount of work done in bringing a point charge of 3 mC from infinity to a point P is 0.06 J. Find
the electric potential at the point P.
23. Write the expression for magnetic force per unit length between two long straight parallel conductors
carrying current. Give the nature of force between two parallel conductors carrying current in same
direction.
24. State and explain Gauss’s law in magnetism.
25. Mention any two factors on which self inductance of a long solenoid depends.
26. Briefly explain the construction of a transformer.
27. What is displacement current? Give expression for the same.
28. Write the two conditions required for total internal reflection.
29. Differentiate conductors from insulators on the basis of band theory of solids.
PART – C

IV. Answer any FIVE of the following questions: 5 × 3 = 15

30. State and explain Coulomb’s law. Define ‘1 çoulomb’.
31. Obtain the expression for potential energy of an electric dipole placed in a uniform electric field.
32. Mention three limitations of Ohm’s law.
33. Obtain an expression for the radius of circular path taken by a charged particle moving perpendicular to
a uniform magnetic field.
34. Mention any three differences between paramagnetic and diamagnetic materials.

II PU PHYSICS MODEL PAPER 23-24 Page 3

35. Explain briefly the coil and magnet experiment to demonstrate electromagnetic induction.
36. Write the Cartesian sign conventions used in analyzing reflection of light by spherical mirrors.
37. Give de Broglie’s explanation of Bohr’s second postulate of quantisation of angular momentum.
38. Calculate the mass defect and binding energy of 7N14, given that the rest mass of nitrogen nucleus is
14.00307 u, rest mass of proton is 1.00783 u and rest mass of neutron is 1.00867 u.

PART – D
V. Answer any THREE of the following questions: 3 × 5 = 15

39. Derive the expression for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with air as dielectric. Write the
expression for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with some dielectric medium introduced between
the plates.
40. Obtain the condition for balance of Wheatstone bridge using Kirchhoff’s rules.
41. Derive an expression for the magnetic field at a point on the axis of a circular current loop.
42. a) State Huygens principle. (2)
b) Using Huygens principle arrive at Snell’s law of refraction for a plane wave. (3)
43. a) Define work function of a photosensitive material. (1)
b) What is meant by photoelectric effect? Give Einstein’s explanation of photoelectric effect. (4)
44. What is rectification? Explain the working of a full wave rectifier using the circuit diagram. Also draw
input-output waveforms.
VI. Answer any TWO of the following questions: 2 × 5 = 10
45. Two point charges each of +2  C are placed at the two corners A and B of an equilateral triangle ABC
of side 0.2 m. Find the magnitude and direction of the resultant electric field at C.
46. The number density of free electrons in copper is estimated to be 8.5 x 1028 m–3. A copper wire of
length 3.0 m and area of cross-section 2.0 mm2 is carrying a current of 3.0 A. Calculate the drift
velocity of electrons. How long does an electron take to drift from one end of the wire to its other end?
47. A sinusoidal voltage of rms value 200 V and frequency 50 Hz is applied to a series RC circuit in which
R = 5  and C = 800 F.
Calculate: a) impedance of the circuit and b) the current through the circuit.
48. A parallel beam of light is incident on one face of an equilateral prism. By rotating the prism, the angle
of minimum deviation is measured to be 40o. Determine the refractive index of the material of the
prism. If the prism is immersed completely in water (refractive index = 1.33), calculate the new angle of
minimum deviation.
&&&&

II PU PHYSICS MODEL PAPER 23-24 Page 4

 Blue Print for the Physics Model Question Paper 1

II PUC PHYSICS (33)

1 Mark (MCQ)

2 Marks (SA1)

3 Marks (SA2)
Marks allotted

1 Mark (FIB)

5 Marks (LA)

5 Marks (NP)
Teaching
Chapter

Hours
Unit

Topic

I 1 Electric Charges and Fields 12 11 1 1 1 1

II 2 Electric Potential and Capacitance 12 11 1 1 1 1

III 3 Current Electricity 15 14 1 1 1 1 1

IV 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism 13 12 1 1 1 1 1

5 Magnetism and Matter 6 6 1 1 1

V
6 Electromagnetic Induction 8 8 2 1 1 1

7 Alternating Current 8 8 1 1 1
VI
8 Electromagnetic Waves 3 3 1 1

VII 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 11 11 1 1 1 1

VII 10 Wave Optics 8 7 1 1 1

I

11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6 6 1 1(ST)

IX
12 Atoms 4 4 1 1

13 Nuclei 5 5 1 1 1
X
14 Semiconductor Devices & Electronics 9 9 1 1 1(ST)

TOTAL = 115 Marks 120 115 15 05 18 27 30 20

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 1 (2023-2024)
II PUC PHYSICS (33)
TIME: 3 hours 15 min. MAX MARKS: 70

General instructions
a) All parts are compulsory
b) Part – A questions have to be answered in the first two pages of the answer-booklet.
For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks
c) Answer without relevant diagram/ figure/ circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks
d) Direct answers to the Numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks
PART - A

I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15

1. Torque acting on an electric dipole in a uniform electric field is maximum if the angle between P
and E is

a. 1800 b. 00 c. 900 d. 450

2. In a parallel plate capacitor, the capacity increases if

a. Area of the plates is decreased b. Distance between the plates increased

c. Area of the plates is increased d. Dielectric constant decreases

3. Consider the following two sentences

(A) Kirchhoff’s junction law follow from the conservation of charge.

(B) Kirchhoff’s loop laws follow from the conservation of energy.

a. Both (A) and (B) are wrong b. (A) is correct and (B) is wrong

c. (A) is wrong and (B) is correct d. Both (A) and (B) are correct

4. Ratio of magnetic fields at 10cm and 20cm from a infinitely long current carrying wire is

a. 1 : 2 b. 1 : 4 c. 2 : 1 d. 4 : 1

5. Domain formation is the necessary feature of

a. Diamagnetism b. Paramagnetism c. Ferromagnetism d. All of these

6. Whenever a magnet is moved either towards or away from a conducting coil, an emf is induced,
the magnitude of which is independent of

a. The strength of the magnetic field b. The speed with which the magnet is moved

c. The number of turns in the coil d. The resistance of the coil

II PU PHYSICS MQP-1 23-24 Page 1

7. A 2m wire is moving with a velocity of 1 m/s perpendicular to a magnetic field of 0.5 wb/m 2.

The emf induced in it will be

a. 0.5 volt b. 0.1 volt c. 1 volt d. 2 volt
8. In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current
a. Lags behind the emf in phase b. Is in phase with the emf
c. Leads the emf in phase d. Leads the emf in half cycle and lags behind it in other half
9. The cross product of electric and magnetic field gives
a. Direction of EM wave propagation b. Speed of light c. Null vector d. All of these
10. Image formed by a convex lens is virtual and erect when the object is placed
a. At F b. Between F and the lens c. At 2F d. Beyond 2F
11. Two light sources are said to be of coherent nature
a. When they have same frequency and varying phase difference
b. When they have same frequency and a constant phase difference
c. When they have different frequency and a constant phase difference
d. When they have different frequency and varying phase difference
12. A electron of mass me and a proton mp are moving with the same speed. The ratio of their de
𝝀
Broglie wavelengths 𝒆 is
𝝀𝒑
a. 1 b. 1836 c. 1/1836 d. 918
13. The ratio of kinetic energy to the total energy of an electron in Bohr orbit of the hydrogen atom
is
a. 1 : 1 b. 1 : -1 c. 1 : -2 d. 2 : -1
14. The radius of nucleus is
a. Proportional to its mass number b. Inversely proportional to its mass number
c. Proportional to the cube root of its mass number d. Not related to its mass number
15. Intrinsic germanium and silicon at absolute zero temperature behave like
a. Super conductor b. Good semiconductor c. Insulator d. Conductor

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the brackets for ALL the
following questions: 5×1=5
(Isotones, Potential, Voltage, Diffraction, Electro motive force, Magnetic flux)
16. The potential difference across the terminals of a cell when no current is being drawn from it is called
__________.
17. Voltage sensitivity is defined as the deflection per unit _________.
18. _________ is proportional to the number of magnetic lines passing through a surface.
19. The phenomenon of bending nature of light around the corners of an obstacle is called _________.
20. _________ are the nuclei having same neutron number but different atomic number.
PART - B
III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 2 = 10
21. A polythene piece rubbed with wool is found to have a negative charge of 3.2 x 10 -7C. Estimate the
number of electrons transformed.
22. Define equipotential surface. Give an example.
23. Draw the graphs which show the variation of resistivity with temperature of (i) copper and (ii)
nichrome
24. State & explain Ampere’s circuital law.
25. Define the terms (i) Magnetisation & (ii) Magnetic intensity
26. State and explain Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction.
27. What is a transformer? State the principle of transformer.
28. Give any two applications of X-rays
29. Draw a neat-labeled ray diagram of a simple microscope for the image formation
PART - C
IV. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 3 = 15

II PU PHYSICS MQP-1 23-24 Page 2

30. Using Gauss’s law in electrostatics, obtain the expression for electric field due to infinitely long straight
charged wire.
𝑑𝑉
31. Show that 𝐸 = − 𝑑𝑥
32. How can a moving coil galvanometer be converted into voltmeter? Explain with a diagram and
expression
33. Mention any three properties of magnetic field lines
34. Obtain the expression for energy stored in inductor carrying current
35. Derive f = R/2 for a concave mirror.
36. Write the postulates of Bohr’s atomic model.
37. Two stable isotopes of lithium 3Li6 and 3Li7 have respective abundances of 7.5% and 92.5%. These
isotopes have masses 6.01512 u and 7.01600 u, respectively. Find the atomic mass of lithium.
38. Give three differences between n-type and p-type semiconductors
PART - D
V. Answer any THREE of the following questions. 3 x 5 = 15
39. Derive the expression for electric field due at a point on the axial line of a dipole.
40. Obtain the expression for equivalent internal resistance and equivalent emf of 2 cells in parallel
combination
41. Derive the expression for force per unit length between two straight parallel current carrying
conductors of infinite length. Hence define “ampere”.
42. Arrive at the expression for the refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of the angle of the
prism and angle of minimum deviation.
43. (a) Define electron volt (eV) (1)
(b) Write four experimental observations of photoelectric effect (4)
44. (a) What is half wave rectifier? (1)
(b) Draw the circuit diagram, input and output waveforms for half wave rectifier. (2)
(c) Describe the working of a p-n junction diode as a half wave rectifier. (2)
VI. Answer any TWO of the following questions. 2 x 5 = 10
45. Two point charges +1 nC and -4 nC are 1m apart in air. Find the positions along the line joiningthe two
charges at which resultant potential is zero.
46. Resistances in cyclic order in a Whetstone’s network are 2Ω, 3 Ω, 1 Ω and 2 Ω. Resistance of the
galvanometer is 10 Ω. Emf of the cell is 1.2V and its internal resistance is negligible. What is the
current through the galvanometer?
47. A pure inductor of 25.0 mH is connected to a source of 220 V & 50Hz. Find the inductive reactance
and rms current and peak current in the circuit.

48. In Young’s double slit experiment distance between the slits is 0.5 mm. When the screen is kept at a
distance of 100 cm from the slits the distance of 9th bright fringe from the central fringe system is
8.835 mm. Find the wavelength of light used.

II PU PHYSICS MQP-1 23-24 Page 3

 Blue Print for the Physics Model Question Paper 2

II PUC PHYSICS (33)

1 Mark (MCQ)

2 Marks (SA1)

3 Marks (SA2)
Marks allotted

1 Mark (FIB)

5 Marks (LA)

5 Marks (NP)
Teaching
Chapter

Topic

Hours
Unit

I 1 Electric Charges and Fields 12 11 1 1 1 1

II 2 Electric Potential and Capacitance 12 11 1 1 1 1

III 3 Current Electricity 15 14 1 1 1 1

IV 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism 13 12 1 1 1 1 1

5 Magnetism and Matter 6 6 1 1 1

V
6 Electromagnetic Induction 8 8 1 1 1

7 Alternating Current 8 8 2 1 1
VI
8 Electromagnetic Waves 3 3 1 1

VII 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 11 11 1 1 1 1

VII 10 Wave Optics 8 7 1 1 1(ST)

I

11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6 6 1 1 1

IX
12 Atoms 4 4 1 1

13 Nuclei 5 5 1 1 1
X
14 Semiconductor Devices & Electronics 9 9 1 1 1 1(ST)

TOTAL = 115 Marks 120 115 15 05 18 27 30 20

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 2 (2023-2024)
II PUC PHYSICS (33)
TIME: 3 hours 15 min. MAX MARKS: 70

General instructions

a) All parts are compulsory

b) Part – A questions have to be answered in the first two pages of the answer-booklet.
For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks
c) Answer without relevant diagram/ figure/ circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks
d) Direct answers to the Numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks

PART - A

I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15
1. The electric field inside a spherical shell of uniform surface charge density is

a. Zero b. Constant c. Directly proportional to distance from the centre d. None of the
above

2. A parallel plate condenser with oil (dielectric constant 2) between the plates has capacitance C.

If oil is removed, the capacitance of capacitor becomes

𝐶 𝐶
a. √2𝐶 b. 2C c. d.
√2 2

3. The SI unit of mobility is

𝑚2 𝑚2 𝑚 2𝑉 𝑚
a. b. c. d.
𝑉𝑠 𝑉 𝑠 𝑉𝑠

4. An charged particle is moving in a uniform magnetic field in a circular path. Radius of circular
path is R.

When energy of the particle is doubled, then new radius will be.

a. R√2 b. √3 c. 2R d. 3R

5. The relative permeability ( 𝝁𝒓 ) of a substance is related to its susceptibility ( χ ) as

a. 𝜇𝑟 = 1 - χ b. 𝜇𝑟 = 1 + χ c. 𝜇𝑟 = 1 – χ2 d. 𝜇𝑟 = 1 + χ2

6. Lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction corresponds to the law of conservation of

a. Energy b. Charge c. Momentum d. Angular momentum

7. The equation of an alternating voltage is V = 100√𝟐 sin 100πt volt. The RMS value of voltage is

a. 100 V b. 50 V c. 150 V d. 200V

II PU PHYSICS MQP-2 23-24 Page 1

8. At high frequency, the capacitor offer

a. More reactance b. Less reactance c. Zero reactance d. Infinite reactance

9. Which of the following rays has highest wavelength?

a. X-rays b. Radio waves c. UV-rays d. Micro waves

10. Which of the following mirrors can form real image?

a. Plane mirror b. Convex mirror c. Concave mirror d. All of these

11. The theory associated with secondary wavelets is

a. Doppler’s effect b. Special theory of relativity

c. Huygens’s wave theory d. None of the above

12. Which of the following statement is correct?

a. The photocurrent increases with intensity of light

b. The stopping potential increases with increase of incident light

c. The current in photocell increases with increasing frequency

d. The photocurrent is proportional to applied voltage

13. If a0 is radius of first Bohr orbit in hydrogen atom, the radius of the third orbit is

a. 3 a0 b. 9 a0 c. 27 a0 d. 81 a0

14. What will be the ratio of radii of Li7 nucleus to Fe56 nucleus?

a. 1 : 3 b. 1:2 c. 1 : 4 d. 1 : 8

15. To obtain electrons as majority charge carries in a semiconductor, the impurity mixed is

a. Monovalent b. Divalent c. Trivalent d. Pentavalent

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the brackets for ALL the
following

questions: 5×1=5
(Generator, Pitch, Obstacle, Transformer, Rectified, nuclear)

16. The distance moved along the magnetic field in one rotation is called _________

17. _______ is a device used to change the alternating voltage.

18. For diffraction of light to occur the size of the ________should be comparable with the wavelength.

19. The density of __________ matter is approximately 2.3 x 10 17 kg m-3.

II PU PHYSICS MQP-2 23-24 Page 2

20. The output voltage obtained by using capacitor input filter is nearer to the peak voltage of the
___________ voltage.

PART - B

III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5x2=10

21. When will be the electric flux is (i) maximum (ii) minimum through a surface?

22. Define polar and non-polar molecules.

23. What is Lorentz force? Write the expression for Lorentz force.

24. Calculate the maximum torque acting on a bar magnet of magnetic moment of 5 Am2 placed in a
magnetic field of induction 10 T.

25. Mention an expression for mutual inductance of two long coaxial solenoids and explain the symbols.

26. Mention any two properties of electromagnetic waves.

27. Write two applications of total internal reflection.

28. What are matter waves? Write the de-Broglie relation for de-Broglie wavelength.

29. Give an example for elemental and compound semiconductor.

PART - C

IV. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5x3=15

30. Derive the expression for torque on an electric dipole placed in a uniform external electric field.

31. Mention the three properties of equipotential surface.

32. Obtain the relation 𝐉 = σ E where terms have usual meaning.

33. How can a moving coil galvanometer be converted into ammeter? Explain with a diagram and
expression.

34. Write any three properties of ferromagnetic materials.

35. Write the principle and two uses of optical fibres.

36. Light of frequency 8.47x1014Hz is incident on a metal surface. Electrons with their maximum speed of
7.5x105 ms-1 are ejected from the surface. Calculate the threshold frequency for the photo emission of
electrons.

37. Write an expression for total energy of electron in stationary orbit and explain the terms. Mention its
value for ground state of hydrogen atom.

38. Mention any three properties of nuclear force.

II PU PHYSICS MQP-2 23-24 Page 3

 PART - D

V. Answer any THREE of the following questions. 3x5=15

39. Define electric potential. Obtain the expression for electric potential due to an isolated point charge.

40. Obtain the expression for equivalent internal resistance and equivalent emf of 2 cells in series
combination.

41. Derive an expression for the torque acting on a current loop placed in uniform magnetic field.

42. Arrive at the expression for the refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of the angle of the
prism and angle of minimum deviation.

43. (a) Define polarization of light. (1)

(b) What are Polaroid’s? (1)

(c) Mention three applications of Polaroid’s. (3)

44. (a) What is a semiconductor diode? (1)

(b) Draw the circuit symbol for p-n junction diode. (1)

(c) Describe with suitable block diagram action of p-n junction diode under forward bias condition.

(3)

VI. Answer any TWO of the following questions. 2x5=10

45. Three point charges are placed at the following points on the x axis: 2𝜇C at x=0, -3𝜇C at x=40cm and -
5𝜇C at x=120cm. Calculate the force on the -3𝜇C charge.

46. A wire of length 2m, diameter 1mm and resistivity 1.963 × 10 -6 Ωm is connected in series with a battery
of emf 3V and internal resistance 1Ω. Calculate the resistance of the wire and the current in the circuit.

47. A circular coil of radius 10cm and 25 turns is rotated about its vertical diameter with an angular speed
of 40 rads-1 in a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 5 x 10 -2T. Calculate the emf induced in
the coil. Also find the current in the coil if the resistance of the coil is 15 Ω

48. A convex lens has focal length of 0.1m in air. Calculate its power. If the lens is completely immersed in
water, what will be the change in the power of the lens? Given ng=3/2, nw=4/3.

II PU PHYSICS MQP-2 23-24 Page 4

 Blue Print for the Physics Question Paper 3
II PUC PHYSICS (33)

1 Mark (MCQ)

2 Marks (SA1)

3 Marks (SA2)
Marks allotted

1 Mark (FIB)

5 Marks (LA)

5 Marks (NP)
Teaching
Chapter

Topic

Hours
Unit

I 1 Electric Charges and Fields 12 11 1 1 1 1

II 2 Electric Potential and Capacitance 12 11 1 1 1 1

III 3 Current Electricity 15 14 1 1 2 1 1

IV 4 Moving Charges and Magnetism 13 12 1 1 1(ST) 1

5 Magnetism and Matter 6 6(5) 1 1 1

V
6 Electromagnetic Induction 8 8(9) 1 1 1

7 Alternating Current 8 8 1 1 1
VI
8 Electromagnetic Waves 3 3 1 1

VII 9 Ray Optics and Optical Instruments 11 11 1 1 1 1

VII 10 Wave Optics 8 7 1 1 1 1

I

11 Dual Nature of Radiation and Matter 6 6 1 1

IX
12 Atoms 4 4 1 1

13 Nuclei 5 5(6) 1 1(ST)

X
14 Semiconductor Devices & Electronics 9 9(8) 1 1 1 1

TOTAL = 115 Marks 120 115 15 05 18 27 30 20

 MODEL QUESTION PAPER 3 (2023-2024)
II PUC PHYSICS (33)
TIME: 3 hours 15 min. MAX MARKS: 70
General instructions
a) All parts are compulsory
b) Part – A questions have to be answered in the first two pages of the answer-booklet.
For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks
c) Answer without relevant diagram/ figure/ circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks
d) Direct answers to the Numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks

PART - A

I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15
1. The property which differentiates the two kinds of charges is called the __________ of charge

a. Magnitude b. Positive c. Negative d. Polarity

2. Identify the wrong statement

a. The electric potential energy of a system of 2 protons shall increase if the separation between the
two is decreased

b. The electric potential energy of a proton electron system will increase if the separation between the
two is decreased

c. The electric potential energy of a proton electron system will increase if the separation between the
two is increased

d. The electric potential energy of a 2 electrons shall increase if the separation between the two is
decreased

3. Current density J at an area ⃗𝑨 = ( 2 𝒊 + 3 𝒋 ) mm2 is 𝒋 = ( 3 𝒊 + 4 𝒋 ) Am-2. Current through the

area is

a. 9 µA b. Zero c. 18 µA d. 12 µA

4. The magnetic dipole moment of a current loop is independent of

a. Magnetic field in which it is lying b. Number of turns

c. Area of the loop d. Current in the loop

5. The most exotic diamagnetic materials are

a. Semiconductors b. conductors c. superconductors d. Insulators

6. A 50 mH coil carries a current of 2 A, the energy stored in joule is

a. 1 b. 0.05 c. 10 d. 0.1

II PU PHYSICS MQP-3 23-24 Page 1

7. Consider the following two sentences

(A) In series 𝐿−𝐶−𝑅 circuit resonance can take place

(B) Resonance takes place if inductive and capacitive reactance are equal and opposite.

a. Both (A) and (B) are wrong b. (A) is correct and (B) is wrong

c. (A) is wrong and (B) is correct d. Both (A) and (B) are correct

8. Maxwell in his famous equation of electromagnetism introduced the concept

a. AC current b. DC current c. Displacement current d. Impedance

9. A ray of light is incident on an equilateral glass prism placed on a horizontal table.

For minimum deviation which of the following is true?

a. 𝑃𝑄 is horizontal b. 𝑄𝑅 is horizontal c. 𝑅𝑆 is horizontal d. None of these

10. The diffraction effect can be observed in

a. Only sound waves b. Only light waves

c. Only ultrasonic waves d. Sound as well as light waves

11. Photon of frequency ν has a momentum associated with it. If c is the velocity of light, the
momentum is
𝑣 ℎ𝑣 ℎ𝑣
a. b. hvc c. d.
𝑐 𝑐2 𝑐

12. Which spectrum acts as fingerprint for identification of gas?

a. Band emission spectrum b. Line emission spectrum

c.Band absorption spectrum d. Line absorption spectrum

𝟒
13. 𝟐𝑯𝒆 + 𝟗𝟒𝑩𝒆  𝟏𝟎𝒏 + ? The missing ion in the given nuclear reaction is

a. Proton b. Oxygen-12 c. Carbon-12 d. Nitrogen-12

14. The 𝑛-type semiconductors are obtained, when germanium is doped with

a. Arsenic b. Phosphorus c. Antimony d. Any of these

15. When a 𝑝-𝑛 junction diode is reverse biased, then

a. No current flows b. The depletion region is increased

c. The depletion region is reduced d. The height of the potential barrier is reduced

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the brackets for ALL the following

questions: 5×1=5

(Increases, temperature , energy, perpendicular, wave front, dynamic resistance)

II PU PHYSICS MQP-3 23-24 Page 2

16. As the temperature increases, the electrical resistance _________

17. A charged particle moves through a magnetic field in a direction ___________ to it. Then the speed of
the particle remains unchanged.

18. At high enough_________, a ferromagnet becomes a paramagnet.

19. The energy of the wave travels in a direction perpendicular to the ___________.

20. The ratio of small change in voltage to a small change in current is called __________

PART - B
III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5x2=10

21. Define electric dipole moment. Give its SI unit.

22. Mention the expression for the energy stored in a capacitor and explain the terms.

23. State Kirchhoff’s laws of electrical network.

24. Find the equivalent emf of two cells of emf 4V and 2V respectively connected in series.

25. Define power factor. Mention its expression.

26. Give the wavelength range of microwaves. Write one application of it.

27. State and explain Snell’s law of refraction.

28. Give conditions for secondary minima and maxima in diffraction.

29. Draw the I-V characteristics of a semiconductor diode.

PART - C
IV. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5x3=15

30. Give any three properties of electric field lines.

31. Obtain the expression for effective capacitance of two capacitors when connected in parallel.

32. Derive the expression for drift velocity.

33. Write the expression for magnetic potential energy of a dipole. Mention when it is maximum and
minimum.

34. Obtain an expression for motional emf.

35. Draw a neat labelled ray diagram of a compound microscope for the image formation and write the
expression for its magnification when the image is at near point.

II PU PHYSICS MQP-3 23-24 Page 3

36. Two polaroid’s are obtained to transmit light with maximum intensity. One of the polaroid is turned
through 450 from the initial position. What percentage of incident light on the second Polaroid is now
transmitted by it?

37. Mention two limitations of Bohr atom model.

38. Give three differences between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

PART - D
V. Answer any THREE of the following questions. 3x5=15

39. Using Gauss’s law in electrostatics, obtain the expression for electric field due to a uniformly charged
thin spherical shell at a point. (i) Outside the shell and (ii) Inside the shell.

40. Derive an expression for conductivity of a conductor in terms of relaxation time.

41. (a) State & explain Ampere’s circuital law. (2)

(b) Using Ampere’s circuital law derive an expression for magnetic field at a point due to a
long straight wire carrying current. (3)

42. With the help of a labelled diagram, derive an expression for instantaneous current induced emf in an
AC generator.

43. Derive Lens-maker’s formula.

44. (a) Define specific binding energy. (1)

(b) Mention the significance of specific binding energy. (1)

(c) Give three differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion. (3)

VI. Answer any TWO of the following questions. 2x5=10

45. Two capacitors of capacitance 600pF & 900pF are connected in series across a 200V supply. Calculate
(i) the effective capacitance of the combination, (ii) the potential difference across each capacitor and
(iii) the total charge stored in the system.

46. A circular coil of 20 turns of mean radius 0.06m carries a current of 1A. Calculate the magnetic field at
(i) the centre of the coil (ii) a point on the axis distant 0.08m from its centre.
(Given 𝜇 0=4𝜋 x 10-7 Tm/A.)

47. A resistor 100Ω, a pure inductance coil of L = 0.5 H and capacitor are in series in a circuit containing
an ac of 200V, 50 Hz. In the circuit current is ahead of the voltage by 30o. Find the value of the
capacitance.

48. A photon of wavelength 540nm is incident on a metal of threshold wavelength 600nm. Calculate
(i) Maximum KE of photon (ii) Stopping potential and (iii) Maximum velocity of photo electrons.
(Given: me = 9.1 x 10-31 kg, h = 6.63 x 10-34Js, c= 3 x 108m/s.)

II PU PHYSICS MQP-3 23-24 Page 4

 MARCH 2024

II PUC PHYSICS (33)

TIME: 3 hours 15 min. MAX MARKS: 70
General instructions
a) All parts are compulsory
b) Part – A questions have to be answered in the first two pages of the answer-booklet.
For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks
c) Answer without relevant diagram/ figure/ circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks
d) Direct answers to the Numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks
PART - A
I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15
1. The electric dipole placed in uniform electric field is unstable equilibrium, if the angle between
electric field and dipole moment is
a. 00 b. 600 c. 900 d. 1800
2. The capacitance of a capacitor is 6 x 10-6 farad. It is connected to 200 volt cell. The energy
released on discharging it fully, will be
a. 0.12 J b. 0.24 J c. 0.6 J d. 12 J
3. The current density is a
a. scalar and its SI unit is Am2 b. vector and its SI unit is A/m3
c. vector and its SI unit is A/m2 d. scalar and its SI unit is A/m
4. A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long straight thin walled pipe, then the
magnetic field
a. at all points inside the pipe is same but not zero b. at any point inside the pipe is zero
c. is zero only on the axis of the pipe d. is different at different points inside the pipe
5. The universal property among all substances is
a. Diamagnetism b. Paramagnetism c. Ferromagnetism d. Non magnetism
6. A bar magnet is kept along the axis of a circular coil. If the magnet is rotated about its axis, then
a. a current will be induced in the coil b. no current will be induced in the coil
c. an emf and current both will be induced in the coil d. only an emf will be induced in the coil
7. Current in a coil changes from 1.6A to 0.2A in 2 second inducing an emf of 2.8V. the value of
self-inductance of the coil is
a. 40 H b. 28 H c. 4 H d. 56 H
8. The resonance phenomenon is exhibited by a circuit only if the following components are present
a. L and R b. R and C c. L and C d. None of the above
9. According to the generalized Ampere-Maxwell law, ∮ 𝑩. 𝒅𝒍 is equal to
𝑑𝜑𝐸 𝑑𝜑𝐸 𝑑𝜑𝐸
a. µ0 𝑖𝑐 + µ0 𝜀0 b. µ0 𝑖𝑐 c. 𝜀0 d. µ0 𝜀0
𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡 𝑑𝑡

II PU PHYSICS MARCH 2024 1

10. Modern telescopes called reflecting telescopes use a concave mirror rather than a lens for
objective because
I. no chromatic aberration in the mirror
II. giving mechanical support to a mirror is easier.
a. I is true, II is false b. I is false, II is true
c. Both I and II are true d. Both I and II are false
11. According to Huygen’s principle, the speed of secondary wavelets is
a. twice that of the wave b. zero
c. same as the wave d. infinite
12. Macroscopic particles in our daily life do not show wake like properties because
a. they are not associated with waves b. their wave length is extremely high
c. their wavelength is zero d. their wavelength is negligibly small
13. At the distance of closest approach of an α-particle with gold nucleus,
a. both kinetic energy and potential energy are equal
b. entire kinetic energy is converted into potential energy
c. entire potential energy is converted into kinetic energy
d. both kinetic energy and potential energy are zero
14. The nuclear force is
a. attractive for distance r = 0.5 fm b. attractive for distance r < 0.8 fm
c. repulsive for distance r > 0.8 fm d. repulsive for distance r < 0.8 fm
15. p-type semiconductor is electrically.
a. positive b. negative c. neutral d. as temperature it becomes negative

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the brackets for ALL the
following questions: 5×1=5
(decreasing, interference, helium, greater, diffraction, increasing)

16. The torque on a rectangular current loop in a uniform magnetic field increases by ___________ the
area of the loop.
17. The mutual inductance of a solenoid can be decreased by ___________ the number of turns per unit
length either in inner or outer solenoid.
18. Fringes of unequal intensities are obtained in ___________ pattern.
19. Alpha particle is a __________ nucleus.
20. The value of energy band in insulator is ___________ than 3eV.

PART - B
III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 2 = 10
21. State and explain Gauss’s law in electrostatics.
22. Two point charges 5 x 10 -8 C and -3 x 10-8 C are located 10cm apart. Find the point between the two
charges where potential is zero.

II PU PHYSICS MARCH 2024 2

 23. When the force experienced by a moving charge in magnetic field becomes
(i) Maximum (ii) Minimum?
24. Define susceptibility and magnetisation for a magnetic material.
25. Write the principle of AC generator. Mention the expression for induced emf in it.
26. Give any two sources of energy loss in actual transformer.
27. Mention any two applications of UV (Ultraviolet) rays.
28. What is power of a lens? Write its SI unit.
29. Distinguish between intrinsic and extrinsic semiconductors.

PART - C
(ii) Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 3 = 15
30. Mention any three properties of electric field lines.
𝑑𝑉
31. Deduce E = - 𝑑𝑋 where, the terms have usual meaning.
32. Give any three limitations of Ohm’s law..
33. Explain, how a galvanometer is converted into voltmeter?
34. Mention any three properties of paramagnetic materials.
35. Lenz’s law is the consequence of law of conservation of energy. Explain.
36. Write Cartesian sigh conventions adopted for measuring distances in reflection of light at spherical
mirrors.
37. Write three postulates of Bohr’s atom model.
14
38. Mass defect of 7𝑁 is 0.11236 u. Calculate the binding energy and binding energy per nucleon in
MeV.

PART - D
(iii) Answer any THREE of the following questions. 3 x 5 = 15
39. a) What are polar and non-polar molecules? (2)
b) Derive the expression for capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor (3)
40. Arrive the expressions for equivalent emf and internal resistance of two cells connected in series.
41. Deduce the expression for magnetic field on the axis of circular current loop.
42. (a) What is the interference of light? (1)
(b) Give the conditions for constructive and destructive interference of light in terms of path
difference. (2)
(c) Mention any two applications of Polaroid’s. (2)
43. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation. Using this, explain the experimental observations of photo
electric effect.
44. What is a rectifier? Explain the working of p-n junction diode as a full wave rectifier with circuit and
input-out put waveforms.
(iv) Answer any TWO of the following questions. 2 x 5 = 10
45. Two point charges +15µC and -10µC are separated by a distance 20cm in air. Calculate the electric
field at the midpoint of the line joining two charges. If a point charge of 20 mC is placed at that
midpoint, what is the magnitude of electric force experienced by it?

II PU PHYSICS MARCH 2024 3

46. In the given whetstone’s network, calculate the value
of electric current flowing through the galvanometer.

47. A sinusoidal voltage of 250 V and frequency 50Hz is applied to a series LCR circuit. In which,
R = 6 Ω, L = 25 mH and C = 796 µF. Calculate
a) the impedance of the circuit and b) the power factor.
48. A small bulb (a point source) is placed at the bottom of a tank containing water to a depth of 80 cm.
What is the radius of the circular surface of water through which light emerge out? Refractive index of
water is 1 .33.

II PU PHYSICS MARCH 2024 4

 APRIL 2024

II PUC PHYSICS (33)

TIME: 3 hours 15 min. MAX MARKS: 70
General instructions
a) All parts are compulsory
b) Part – A questions have to be answered in the first two pages of the answer-booklet.
For Part – A questions, first written-answer will be considered for awarding marks
c) Answer without relevant diagram/ figure/ circuit wherever necessary will not carry any marks
d) Direct answers to the Numerical problems without detailed solutions will not carry any marks

PART - A
I. Pick the correct option among the four given options for ALL of the following
questions: 15 × 1 = 15
1. How many electrons must be removed from a body to get charge on the body +1C?
a. 6.25 x 1012 b. 6.25 x 1018 c. 1.6 x 1018 d. 1.6 x 1012
2. Water molecule is a polar molecule because
a. The centres of positive and negative charges coincide
b. The centres of positive and negative charges do not coincide
c. It does not have permanent dipole moment
d. In an external electric field it does not induce charges
3. The resistance R of a metallic conductor varies inversely proportional to _________
a. Length of the conductor b. Area of cross section of the conductor
c. Both length and area of cross section of the conductor d. Temperature of the conductor
4. SI unit of magnetic field is
a. gauss b. newton metre ampere c. tesla d. newton metre
5. The net magnetic moment per unit volume of a substance is
a. magnetisation b. magnetic permeability c. magnetic susceptibility d. magnetic flux
6. The magnitude of induced emf in a circuit is equal to the time rate of change of magnetic flux
through the circuit is the statement of :
a. Gauss’s law in magnetism b. Faraday’s law moved
c. Ampere’s circuital law d. Biot Savarts law
7. Statement I : Inductance is a scalar quantity
Statement II : The dimensional formula of inductance is [ML2T-2A-2]
a. Statement I is correct and statement II is wrong b. Both the statements I and II are correct
c. Both the statements I and II are wrong d. Statement I is wrong and statement II is correct

II PU PHYSICS APRIL 2024 Page 1

8. Mutual induction is the principle of __________
a. ammeter b. electric motor c. transformer d. voltmeter
9. Which one of the following electromagnetic waves has highest frequency?
a. X-rays b. Radio waves c. Infrared rays d. Gamma rays
10. The ratio of speed of light in vacuum to speed of light in a medium gives:
a. absolute refractive index of the medium b. relative refractive index
c. relative mass density d. mass density of the medium
11. Statement I : Light is transverse electromagnetic wave
Statement II : Polarisation of light confirms transverse nature of light
a. Statement I is correct and statement II is wrong
b. Statements I is correct but statement II is wrong
c. Both the statements are correct and statement II is correct confirmation of statement I
d. Both the statements are wrong
12. Following particles are moving with same speed, which one of them has longest de Broglie
wavelength?
a. proton b. neutron c. alpha particle d. electron
13. The plum pudding model of atom was given by
a. J J Thomson b. Rutherford c. Niels Bohr d. Einstein
14. Which one of the following is not a characteristic of nuclear forces?
a. strongest forces b. saturated forces
c. charge independent forces d. charge dependent forces
15. An intrinsic semiconductor is
a. a substance having equal number of free electrons and holes at room temperature
b. a substance having unequal number of free electrons and holes at room temperature
c. a conductor at temperature T = 0K d. an insulator at room temperature

II. Fill in the blanks by choosing appropriate answer given in the brackets for ALL the
following questions: 5×1=5
(Heavy nucleus, diffraction, attract, decreases, Lenz’s law, repel)
16. Two parallel long straight conductors carrying currents in the same direction _________ each other.
17. ___________ gives polarity of induced emf.
18. The phenomenon in which formation of alternate dark and bright regions in geometrical shodow of
opaque object is called ____________.
19. The breaking of ___________ into two nuclei of intermediate masses and release of energy is called
nuclear fission.
20. When a p-n junction is in forward biased as biased potential increases, the width of depletion region
___________.

II PU PHYSICS APRIL 2024 Page 2

 PART - B
III. Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 2 = 10
21. State and explain Gauss’s law in electrostatics.
22. Two capacitors 3µF and 6µF are connected in series. Find the equivalent capacitance of the
combination.
23. When does a charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field experience?
(i) Maximum force (ii) Minimum force
24. Give any two properties of magnetic field lines.
25. Write an expression for induced emf in a conductor moving perpendicular to uniform magnetic field
and explain the terms.
26. Write an expression for instantaneous current in ac circuit containing pure capacitor and explain the
terms.
27. Give two applications of UV rays.
28. Define critical angle of a medium. Mention the relation between refractive index and critical angle of a
medium.
29. Write any two differences between p-type and n-type semiconductors.

PART - C
(ii) Answer any FIVE of the following questions. 5 x 3 = 15
30. Mention three basic properties of electric charges.
31. Derive the relation between electric field and electric potential in a uniform electric field.
32. State and explain Kirchhoff’s rules of electrical network.
33. With a circuit diagram explain conversion of galvanometer to voltmeter.
34. Write anY three differences between diamagnetic and ferromagnetic substances.
35. Obtain an expression for instantaneous induced emf produced in ac generator.
36. Draw a ray diagram of refraction of monochromatic light through a prism. Mention the expression for
deviation in a thin prism.
37. Deduce the expression for energy of electron in hydrogen atom in terms of radius of the orbit.
38. Calculate binding energy of oxygen nucleus ( 168𝑂 ) in MeV using the following data:
Mass of oxygen nucleus = 15.99053 u
Mass of proton = 1.00727 u
Mass of a neutron = 1.00866 u

PART - D
(iii) Answer any THREE of the following questions. 3 x 5 = 15
39. Obtain an expression for electrostatic potential at a point due to an isolated point charge.
40. Deduce expressions for equivalent emf and equivalent internal resistance, when two different cells are
connected in parallel.
41. Derive the expression for magnetic field at a point on the axis of circular loop.

II PU PHYSICS APRIL 2024 Page 3

42. (a) What are coherent sources? (1)
(b) Mention the conditions for constructive and destructive interference of light in terms of path
difference. (2)
(c) Write any two uses of polaroid’s. (2)
43. (a) What is meant by photoelectric effect? (1)
(b) Mention any experimental observations of photoelectric effect (2)
(c) Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation and explain the terms (2)
44. With a neat circuit diagram explain the working of p-n junction diodes as full wave rectifier, also draw
input and output waveforms.
(iv) Answer any TWO of the following questions. 2 x 5 = 10
45. The electrostatic force on a small sphere of charge0.4µC due to another small sphere of charge -0.8µC
in air separated by a distance (d) is 0.2N.
(a) Find the distance between the two spheres.
(b) What is the magnitude and nature of force on the second sphere due to the first?
46. The number density of free electrons in a copper conductor is 8.0 x 1028 m-3. The area of cross section
of the wire is 1.5 x 10-6 m2 and it is carrying a current of 2.0A. Find the drift velocity of the electrons
and current density.
47. A sinusoidal voltage of rms value 10 V and frequency 50Hz is applied to a series LCR circuit. In
which, R = 3 Ω, L = 12.75 mH Find
a) the impedance of the circuit
b) rms current.
c) Phase difference between current and voltage
48. Double convex lenses are to be manufactured from a glass of RI 1.52, with both faces of same radius
of curvature. What is the radius of curvature required if the focal length is to be 25 cm? What will be
the new focal length, when the lens is immersed in water of RI 1.33?

II PU PHYSICS APRIL 2024 Page 4

 BOARD MQP SOLUTIONS
MQP 1 SOLUTIONS
II PU PHYSICS (33)
II PU PHYSICS (33)
1. B
2. C 1. c
3. B 2. c
4. C 3. d
5. A 4. c
6. C 5. c
7. C 6. d
8. A 7. c
9. D 8. b
10. D 9. a
11. D 10. b
12. D 11. b
13. C 12. b
14. B 13. b
15. B 14. c
15. c
16. Increase
17. Generator 16. Electro motive force
18. Maximum 17. Voltage
19. Thermonuclear fusion 18. Magnetic flux
20. Decrease 19. Diffraction
20. Isotones
22. V = 20 V
21. 2 x 1012 electrons
38. Δm = 0.11243 u, BE = 104.72 MeV
37. m = 6.941 u
45. E = 7.79 x 105 N/C perpendicular to AB
46. Vd = 0.11 x 10-3 m/s, t = 27 x 10-3 s 45. x = 0.2m, 0.33 m from 1nC
47. Z = 6.39 Ω, Irms = 31.29 A 46. Ig = 0.026 A
48. ang = 1.532, wng = 1.152, D’ = 10.30 47. XL = 7.85 Ω, I0 = 39.6 A, Irms = 28 A
48. λ = 4908 A0
 MQP 2 SOLUTIONS MQP 3 SOLUTIONS

II PU PHYSICS (33) II PU PHYSICS (33)

1. a 1. d
2. d 2. b
3. a 3. c
4. a 4. a
5. b 5. c
6. a 6. d
7. a 7. d
8. b 8. c
9. a 9. b
10. c 10. d
11. c 11. d
12. a 12. b
13. b 13. c
14. b 14. d
15. d 15. b

16. Pitch 16. Increases

17. Transformer 17. Perpendicular
18. Obstacle 18. Temperature
19. Nuclear 19. Wavefront
20. Rectified 20. Dynamic resistance

24. 50 Nm 24. Es = 6 V

36. ν0 = 4.61 x 1014 Hz 36. I1 = 50% of I0

I2 = 25% of I0
45. 0.548 N towards left
46. R = 5 Ω, I = 0.5 A 45. Cs = 360pF, V1 = 120V
47. E = 1.57 V, I = 0.11 A V2 = 80V, q = 0.072µC
48. P = 10 D, fw = 0.4 m, Pw = 2.5 D, ΔP = 7.5 D 46. Bcentre = 0.209 mT
Baxis = 0.042 mT
47. C = 14.82 µF
48. Kmax = 0.368 x 10-19 J
Vs = 0.23 V, vmax = 0.28 x 106 m/s
 MARCH 2024 APRIL 2024

II PU PHYSICS (33) II PU PHYSICS (33)

1. D 1. B
2. A 2. B
3. C 3. B
4. B 4. C
5. A 5. A
6. B 6. B
7. C 7. B
8. C 8. C
9. A 9. D
10. C 10. A
11. C 11. C
12. D 12. D
13. B 13. A
14. D 14. D
15. C 15. A

16. Increase 16. Attract

17. Decreasing 17. Lenz law
18. Diffraction 18. Diffraction
19. Helium 19. Heavy nucleus
20. Greater 20. Decreases

22. x= 0.06m 22. Cs = 2µF

38. Δm = 0.11236 u, BE = 104.607 MeV, 38. Δm = 0.13691 u, BE = 127.53 MeV

SBE = 7.47MeV
45. d = 12 cm, same force
45. E = 2.25 x 107 NC-1, F = 4.5 x 155N 46. Vd = 0.104 x 10-3 m/s, J = 1.33 x 106 Am-2.
46. Ig = -(2/49) A 47. XL= 4 Ω, Z = 5 Ω, Irms = 2 A, φ = 530
47. XL = 7.85 Ω, XC = 4Ω, Z = 7.13Ω, cosφ = 0.8415 48. R = 26cm, f’ = 91 cm
0
48. C = 48.75 , r = 0.91m